Security information 1

Preface 2

Using SIMATIC PDM 3

SIMATIC
Installation 4
Process Control System PCS 7
Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1) 5
PDM Exportfile Converter

Integrating devices into

SIMATIC PDM 6
Operating Manual

Views 7

Functions 8
Menus and dialog boxes in
SIMATIC PDM 9
Menus and dialog boxes for
SIMATIC PDM in HW Config 10
Menus and dialog boxes for
SIMATIC PDM in the 11
SIMATIC Manager

SIMATIC PDM Server option 12

Notes, Tips & Tricks 13

SIMATIC PDM V9.1

Appendix A

02/2017
A5E39027365-AA
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be
used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property
damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified
personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding
potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or
approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described.
Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in
this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.

Siemens AG A5E39027365-AA Copyright © Siemens AG 2017.

Division Process Industries and Drives Ⓟ 04/2017 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Table of contents

1 Security information....................................................................................................................................11
2 Preface.......................................................................................................................................................13
3 Using SIMATIC PDM..................................................................................................................................15
3.1 Conditions for secure operation of SIMATIC PDM.................................................................15
3.2 Introduction............................................................................................................................16
3.3 Using the documentation.......................................................................................................17
3.4 Contact partner......................................................................................................................18
3.5 Basis for using intelligent field devices...................................................................................19
3.6 Establishing connections to field devices...............................................................................21
3.7 Product structure....................................................................................................................25
3.7.1 Product packages for SIMATIC PDM.....................................................................................25
3.7.2 Options...................................................................................................................................27
3.7.3 Delivery contents....................................................................................................................29
4 Installation..................................................................................................................................................31
4.1 Compatibility...........................................................................................................................31
4.2 Preparing SIMATIC PDM.......................................................................................................32
4.3 Installing SIMATIC PDM........................................................................................................33
4.4 Setting the language..............................................................................................................36
4.5 Reinstalling / Removing SIMATIC PDM.................................................................................37
5 PDM Exportfile Converter...........................................................................................................................39
5.1 "PDM Exportfile Converter" dialog box..................................................................................39
6 Integrating devices into SIMATIC PDM......................................................................................................41
6.1 Device Integration Manager...................................................................................................41
6.2 "Device Integration Manager" main window...........................................................................42
6.3 Views......................................................................................................................................43
6.3.1 Title bar..................................................................................................................................43
6.3.2 Menu bar................................................................................................................................43
6.3.3 Toolbar...................................................................................................................................44
6.3.4 Device list...............................................................................................................................46
6.3.5 Status bar...............................................................................................................................48
6.3.6 Source folder..........................................................................................................................48
6.3.7 Applying a filter.......................................................................................................................49
6.3.8 Filter file/Project filter..............................................................................................................50
6.4 Working with the Device Integration Manager.......................................................................51
6.4.1 Integrating device descriptions...............................................................................................51

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 3
Table of contents

6.4.2 Completing a device description............................................................................................52

6.4.3 Creating your own device library using the project filter.........................................................53
6.4.4 Creating your own device library from a collection of device descriptions.............................54
6.4.5 Removing device descriptions...............................................................................................55
6.4.6 Update / upgrade of device descriptions (EDD update).........................................................55
6.4.7 Messages...............................................................................................................................55
6.4.8 Checking syntax and semantics.............................................................................................56
6.5 Menus and dialog boxes........................................................................................................57
6.5.1 File.........................................................................................................................................57
6.5.1.1 Read device descriptions from source directory....................................................................57
6.5.1.2 Read device descriptions from compressed source..............................................................57
6.5.1.3 List of integrated device descriptions.....................................................................................58
6.5.1.4 List of device descriptions used.............................................................................................58
6.5.1.5 Save device list......................................................................................................................59
6.5.1.6 Print device list.......................................................................................................................59
6.5.1.7 Deleting the device list...........................................................................................................60
6.5.1.8 Exit.........................................................................................................................................60
6.5.2 View.......................................................................................................................................60
6.5.2.1 Split device list window..........................................................................................................60
6.5.3 Catalog...................................................................................................................................61
6.5.3.1 Complete device information..................................................................................................61
6.5.3.2 Integrate.................................................................................................................................62
6.5.3.3 User-specific device DVD .....................................................................................................62
6.5.3.4 Filter file..................................................................................................................................63
6.5.3.5 Project filter............................................................................................................................63
6.5.3.6 Messages...............................................................................................................................64
6.5.3.7 Find........................................................................................................................................65
6.5.4 ? (Help)..................................................................................................................................65
6.5.4.1 Help........................................................................................................................................65
6.5.4.2 Info.........................................................................................................................................66
7 Views..........................................................................................................................................................67
7.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................67
7.2 Views in SIMATIC Manager...................................................................................................68
7.2.1 Process devices plant view....................................................................................................68
7.2.1.1 Opening the process devices plant view................................................................................68
7.2.1.2 Messages...............................................................................................................................68
7.2.1.3 Adapting the process device plant view.................................................................................69
7.2.2 Process devices network view...............................................................................................69
7.2.3 Project synchronization..........................................................................................................70
7.3 Views in SIMATIC PDM.........................................................................................................71
7.3.1 Main Window "SIMATIC PDM"..............................................................................................71
7.3.2 Title bar..................................................................................................................................72
7.3.3 Menu bar................................................................................................................................72
7.3.4 Toolbar...................................................................................................................................73
7.3.5 Structure view........................................................................................................................73
7.3.6 Parameter table......................................................................................................................74
7.3.6.1 "Parameter" column of the parameter table...........................................................................75
7.3.6.2 "Value" column of the parameter table...................................................................................75
7.3.6.3 "Unit" column of the parameter table.....................................................................................76
7.3.6.4 "Status" column of the parameter table..................................................................................76

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

4 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Table of contents

7.3.6.5 Distributing parameters..........................................................................................................77

7.3.7 Status bar...............................................................................................................................78
7.3.8 Display ..................................................................................................................................79
7.3.8.1 Display in the views................................................................................................................79
7.3.8.2 Stand-alone device view........................................................................................................79
7.3.8.3 Multiple devices view.............................................................................................................80
7.3.9 Keyboard operation................................................................................................................81
8 Functions....................................................................................................................................................83
8.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................83
8.2 Project editing........................................................................................................................85
8.2.1 "Settings" for the SIMATIC project.........................................................................................85
8.2.2 Setting the interface on the computer....................................................................................87
8.2.3 Plant-wide communication by means of routing.....................................................................87
8.2.4 Checking the device integration.............................................................................................88
8.2.5 Print........................................................................................................................................89
8.2.6 Cleaning the project (reorganization) ....................................................................................90
8.2.7 Saving the configuration.........................................................................................................91
8.3 Device management .............................................................................................................92
8.3.1 Inserting devices....................................................................................................................92
8.3.1.1 Inserting objects.....................................................................................................................92
8.3.1.2 "Insert object - ..." dialog box.................................................................................................93
8.3.1.3 "Insert Object - Assign Device Type" dialog box....................................................................94
8.3.1.4 Integrating a device in HW Config..........................................................................................96
8.3.1.5 Setting the bus address in HW Config...................................................................................99
8.3.1.6 Integrating a HART device in a HART modem network.........................................................99
8.3.1.7 Integrating a MODBUS device in a MODBUS network........................................................101
8.3.1.8 Integrating an S7 DSGW gateway.......................................................................................102
8.3.1.9 Integrating a HART server network......................................................................................104
8.3.1.10 Compact PROFIBUS device (sensors and actuators).........................................................110
8.3.1.11 Modular PROFIBUS device (remote I/O).............................................................................111
8.3.1.12 Connecting a field device to PROFINET..............................................................................113
8.3.1.13 HART device on remote I/O.................................................................................................114
8.3.1.14 Inserting a HART device at a HART module........................................................................117
8.3.1.15 Integrating an FF field device...............................................................................................117
8.3.2 Field devices with redundant bus connection .....................................................................118
8.3.2.1 Connecting field devices to a redundant bus system...........................................................118
8.3.2.2 "Select object" dialog box.....................................................................................................119
8.3.2.3 "Properties - Find object" dialog box....................................................................................119
8.3.3 Using unspecified PROFIBUS PA devices as placeholders................................................119
8.3.4 Creating typicals for parameters (import without ID data) ...................................................120
8.3.5 Replacing devices................................................................................................................121
8.3.6 Inserting plant-specific documents for process mode..........................................................122
8.3.7 Operating modes of field devices.........................................................................................123
8.3.8 Deleting devices...................................................................................................................124
8.3.9 Assigning parameters and downloading to devices.............................................................124
8.3.10 Interconnecting and downloading FF devices......................................................................125
8.3.10.1 "Interconnection Editor" dialog box......................................................................................125
8.3.10.2 Downloading objects in the FF segment..............................................................................127
8.4 Communication....................................................................................................................130
8.4.1 Saving/reading the device data............................................................................................130

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 5
Table of contents

8.5 Export / Import......................................................................................................................132

8.5.1 Introduction..........................................................................................................................132
8.5.2 Exporting configuration and parameter assignment data.....................................................134
8.5.3 Importing configuration and parameter assignment data.....................................................136
8.6 Diagnostics...........................................................................................................................139
8.6.1 Field device diagnostics.......................................................................................................139
8.6.2 Overview of Device Icons.....................................................................................................140
8.6.3 Connection diagnostics........................................................................................................143
8.6.4 Identity check.......................................................................................................................143
8.6.5 Updating diagnostics............................................................................................................143
8.7 LifeList..................................................................................................................................145
8.7.1 Working with the LifeList......................................................................................................145
8.7.2 Licensing..............................................................................................................................149
8.7.3 Menus and dialog boxes......................................................................................................150
8.7.3.1 "File" menu...........................................................................................................................150
8.7.3.2 "Edit" menu..........................................................................................................................151
8.7.3.3 "Device" menu......................................................................................................................151
8.7.3.4 "View" menu.........................................................................................................................153
8.7.3.5 "Options" menu....................................................................................................................153
8.7.3.6 "Help" menu.........................................................................................................................153
8.7.4 Menu bar..............................................................................................................................154
8.7.5 Toolbar.................................................................................................................................154
8.7.6 Status bar.............................................................................................................................155
8.8 Logs.....................................................................................................................................156
8.8.1 Message log.........................................................................................................................156
8.9 Graphical displays................................................................................................................158
8.9.1 Graphical display of values..................................................................................................159
8.9.2 Trend chart...........................................................................................................................160
8.9.3 Bar chart...............................................................................................................................162
8.9.4 Tachometer chart.................................................................................................................163
8.9.5 Icons and buttons.................................................................................................................164
8.9.6 Work with trends..................................................................................................................167
8.9.7 Editing trends.......................................................................................................................168
8.10 Asset management..............................................................................................................170
8.10.1 Asset management .............................................................................................................170
8.10.2 Use with the PCS 7 Maintenance Station............................................................................171
9 Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM .............................................................................................175
9.1 "File" menu ..........................................................................................................................175
9.1.1 Save.....................................................................................................................................175
9.1.2 Exporting..............................................................................................................................175
9.1.2.1 "Export - ..." dialog box.........................................................................................................176
9.1.3 Importing..............................................................................................................................179
9.1.3.1 "Import - ..." dialog box.........................................................................................................180
9.1.4 Print......................................................................................................................................183
9.1.5 Exit.......................................................................................................................................183
9.1.5.1 "Save changes?" dialog box................................................................................................184
9.2 Editing (depends on device).................................................................................................185

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

6 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Table of contents

9.3 "Device" menu......................................................................................................................186

9.3.1 Download to device..............................................................................................................186
9.3.1.1 "Download to device - ..." dialog box....................................................................................187
9.3.2 Upload to PG/PC..................................................................................................................188
9.3.2.1 "Upload to PG/PC - ..." dialog box.......................................................................................189
9.3.3 Assign address and TAG.....................................................................................................190
9.3.3.1 "Assign address and TAG..." dialog box..............................................................................191
9.3.4 Value comparison................................................................................................................193
9.3.4.1 "Value Comparison" dialog box............................................................................................193
9.3.4.2 "Select object" dialog box.....................................................................................................194
9.3.5 Object properties..................................................................................................................195
9.3.5.1 "General" tab........................................................................................................................195
9.3.5.2 "Device" tab..........................................................................................................................196
9.3.5.3 "Diagnostics" tab..................................................................................................................196
9.3.5.4 "Communication" tab............................................................................................................197
9.3.5.5 "Document Manager" tab.....................................................................................................199
9.3.6 Calibration log......................................................................................................................199
9.3.6.1 Menus and dialog boxes......................................................................................................201
9.3.6.2 Menu bar..............................................................................................................................206
9.3.6.3 Toolbar.................................................................................................................................206
9.3.7 Change log...........................................................................................................................207
9.3.7.1 Menus and dialog boxes......................................................................................................208
9.3.7.2 Menu bar..............................................................................................................................210
9.3.7.3 Toolbar.................................................................................................................................210
9.3.8 Set device checked..............................................................................................................211
9.3.9 Check configuration.............................................................................................................212
9.3.10 Templates............................................................................................................................214
9.4 "View" menu ........................................................................................................................215
9.4.1 Process variables / Measured value display (depends on device)......................................215
9.4.2 Start LifeList.........................................................................................................................216
9.4.3 Charts and trends (depends on device)...............................................................................216
9.4.3.1 Displaying process variables and measured values ...........................................................217
9.5 "Diagnostics" menu..............................................................................................................219
9.5.1 Update diagnostics...............................................................................................................219
9.5.1.1 "Update diagnostics - ..." dialog box....................................................................................219
9.6 "Options" menu (depends on device)...................................................................................221
9.7 "Help" menu.........................................................................................................................222
9.7.1 Contents...............................................................................................................................222
9.7.2 Help for device parameters..................................................................................................222
9.7.3 Info.......................................................................................................................................222
9.7.4 Find......................................................................................................................................222
9.7.5 Document Manager..............................................................................................................222
10 Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in HW Config.......................................................................223
11 Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC Manager....................................................225
11.1 "Edit" menu..........................................................................................................................225
11.1.1 SIMATIC Manager > "Edit" menu.........................................................................................225
11.1.2 Object properties..................................................................................................................225
11.1.2.1 "General" tab........................................................................................................................226

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 7
Table of contents

11.1.2.2 "Device" tab..........................................................................................................................227

11.1.2.3 "Diagnostics" tab..................................................................................................................227
11.1.2.4 "Communication" tab............................................................................................................228
11.1.2.5 "Document Manager" tab.....................................................................................................230
11.1.3 SIMATIC PDM......................................................................................................................230
11.1.3.1 Synchronize.........................................................................................................................230
11.1.3.2 Exporting..............................................................................................................................230
11.1.3.3 Importing..............................................................................................................................231
11.1.3.4 Download to device..............................................................................................................231
11.1.3.5 Upload to PG/PC..................................................................................................................232
11.1.3.6 Update diagnostics...............................................................................................................233
11.1.3.7 Start LifeList.........................................................................................................................233
11.1.3.8 Device selection (Reassign).................................................................................................233
11.1.3.9 Show change log..................................................................................................................235
11.1.3.10 Synchronizing with HW Config.............................................................................................236
11.1.3.11 Create stand-alone project...................................................................................................237
11.2 "Insert" menu........................................................................................................................240
11.2.1 Inserting an object................................................................................................................240
11.3 "View" menu ........................................................................................................................243
11.3.1 Process devices plant view..................................................................................................243
11.3.2 Menus and dialog boxes in the "Process device plant view" dialog box..............................244
11.3.2.1 Toolbar in the "Process device plant view" dialog box.........................................................244
11.3.2.2 "File" menu...........................................................................................................................244
11.3.2.3 "Device" menu......................................................................................................................246
11.3.2.4 Functions..............................................................................................................................249
11.3.3 Operation view.....................................................................................................................251
11.3.4 Process devices network view.............................................................................................255
11.4 "Options" menu....................................................................................................................256
11.4.1 Settings for SIMATIC PDM..................................................................................................258
11.4.1.1 "General" tab........................................................................................................................259
11.4.1.2 "Communication" tab............................................................................................................259
11.4.1.3 The "Load" tab.....................................................................................................................260
11.4.1.4 "Device Integration Manager" tab........................................................................................261
11.4.1.5 "Maintenance Station" tab....................................................................................................262
11.4.1.6 "PDM clients" tab.................................................................................................................263
11.4.1.7 "Change Log" tab.................................................................................................................264
11.4.1.8 "Service" tab.........................................................................................................................264
11.4.2 Role management................................................................................................................265
11.4.3 HART server........................................................................................................................267
12 SIMATIC PDM Server option....................................................................................................................269
12.1 Setting up the SIMATIC PDM Server...................................................................................269
12.2 SIMATIC PDM Server Configurator.....................................................................................273
12.3 SIMATIC PDM Portal...........................................................................................................276
12.4 Logging on to the SIMATIC PDM Portal..............................................................................277
12.5 "SIMATIC PDM Portal" main window...................................................................................280
12.6 Edit field device in SIMATIC PDM via the browser view......................................................281
12.7 Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the browser view.........................................282

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

8 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Table of contents

12.7.1 "File" menu...........................................................................................................................282

12.7.2 "Device" menu......................................................................................................................282
12.7.3 "View" menu.........................................................................................................................282
12.7.4 "Diagnostics" menu..............................................................................................................282
12.7.5 "Help" menu.........................................................................................................................283
13 Notes, Tips & Tricks.................................................................................................................................285
13.1 Information on configuration and parameter assignment.....................................................285
13.2 Connecting field devices by means of Industrial Ethernet...................................................287
13.3 HART applications...............................................................................................................289
A Appendix...................................................................................................................................................291
A.1 Communication Problems....................................................................................................291
A.2 Message window..................................................................................................................293
A.2.1 "Decision on error" dialog box..............................................................................................293
A.2.2 "Error history" dialog box......................................................................................................293
A.2.3 "Error" dialog box.................................................................................................................293
A.2.4 "Multiple errors" dialog box..................................................................................................293
A.2.5 "Messages" Dialog Box........................................................................................................293
Index.........................................................................................................................................................295

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 9
Table of contents

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

10 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
Security information 1
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines, and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens’ products and solutions only form one element of such a concept.
Customer is responsible to prevent unauthorized access to its plants, systems, machines and
networks. Systems, machines and components should only be connected to the enterprise
network or the internet if and to the extent necessary and with appropriate security measures
(e.g. use of firewalls and network segmentation) in place.
Additionally, Siemens’ guidance on appropriate security measures should be taken into
account. For more information about industrial security, please visit:

http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity.
Siemens’ products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure.
Siemens strongly recommends to apply product updates as soon as available and to always
use the latest product versions. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and
failure to apply latest updates may increase customer’s exposure to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under

http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 11
Security information

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

12 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
Preface 2
Purpose of the program
SIMATIC PDM (Process Device Manager) is a general-purpose, manufacturer-independent
tool for the configuration, parameter assignment, commissioning, diagnostics, and
maintenance of intelligent field devices (sensors and actuators) and field components (remote
I/O, multiplexers, control room devices, compact controllers).

Purpose of the documentation

This documentation supports you in your work with SIMATIC PDM software. You are provided
with an overview of the following topics:
● Installing SIMATIC PDM (Page 31)
● Commissioning the software
● Procedures for configuring networks and field devices
● Procedures for commissioning and using the Runtime functions

Required basic knowledge

The documentation is intended for persons working in field engineering who are responsible
for configuration, commissioning and plant operation.
General knowledge in the area of field engineering is required to understand this
documentation.
Knowledge about the use of Windows operating systems is also required.
Activities using STEP 7 and PCS 7 require corresponding knowledge in the field of automation
technology and of SIMATIC S7.

Validity
This documentation is valid for the SIMATIC PDM V9.1 software package.

Device-specific help
This documentation only covers the basic functionality of PDM. For device-specific information,
refer to the documentation of the field device manufacturers.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 13
Preface

Readme for SIMATIC PDM

For details of the requirements for using SIMATIC PDM, of special functions, and of the various
applications, see file pdmbase-readme. You can locate the file as follows:
● On the SIMATIC PDM product DVD in the main folder of the DVD
● On the SIMATIC PCS 7 product DVD in the folder ...PDM...\PDMBASE\setup
● After installation of SIMATIC PDM:
– By selecting SIEMENS SIMATIC documentation in the Windows Start menu
– The default folder for the file is ...\SIEMENS\SIMATIC_PDM\.

Online help
The SIMATIC PDM online help is a project-specific help feature, which contains the following
information:
● Help for SIMATIC PDM
The PDF file is an extract of the HTML-based online help for SIMATIC PDM. The PDF file
does not contain any device-specific information.
● Device-specific help
Device-specific information contained in the online help is derived from the device
descriptions (EDD) of the devices being used:
– Information on device-specific functions (e.g. available online functions)
– Help for device-specific menu commands (e.g. trend display options, device-specific
display functions and operating functions)
Note
Scope of the device-specific information
The scope of the device-specific information depends on the information that can be
derived from the device descriptions.

The help system is integrated into the software by way of several interfaces:
● The Help menu provides several menu commands: Help Topics opens the help for SIMATIC
PDM.
● The context-sensitive help provides information with regard to the current context such as
open dialog boxes or active windows. The help is called by clicking the "Help" button or by
pressing the F1 key.
● A tooltip is displayed for the toolbar icons when the user hovers the mouse pointer over the
icons.
If you would prefer to read a hardcopy of the help, you can print specific help topics or chapters,
or the entire help.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

14 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
Using SIMATIC PDM 3
3.1 Conditions for secure operation of SIMATIC PDM
SIMATIC PDM must be operated within the framework of the holistic PCS 7 security concept,
see PCS7 & WinCC Security concept (https://www.industry.siemens.com/topics/global/de/
industrial-security/support/seiten/whitepaper.aspx) and Siemens Industrial Security (https://
www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

In particular, SIMATIC PDM may only be used in trustworthy networks. Web clients must be
operated in the same security cell or trust zone as the Web server. This also means that direct
access from external networks (e.g. the Internet) is not supported and must be prevented.

Access from external networks (for example, an office network outside the process control
network) to the PDM Web server (in the process control network) can be implemented using
a terminal server in the perimeter network (DMZ). Users should only have minimal user rights
on the terminal server. This only relates to the use of a Web browser. Secure configuration
and licensing of the terminal server must be performed in compliance with the manufacturer
recommendations.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 15
Using SIMATIC PDM
3.2 Introduction

3.2 Introduction
SIMATIC PDM (Process Device Manager) is a general-purpose, manufacturer-independent
tool for configuration, parameter assignment, commissioning, diagnostics and maintenance of
intelligent field devices (sensors and actuators) and field components (remote I/Os,
multiplexers, control room units, compact controllers). These are simply referred to as devices
in the rest of this documentation.
With one software package, SIMATIC PDM enables processing of more than 2500 devices
from Siemens and 200 other manufacturers from around the world with an homogeneous user
interface.
The PDM Web application can be used on mobile devices with the Android operating system.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

16 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Using SIMATIC PDM
3.3 Using the documentation

3.3 Using the documentation

Scope
SIMATIC PDM operates within a SIMATIC STEP 7 / PCS 7 environment or in combination
with suitable function modules.

Conventions
The names of the user interfaces in this software are listed in accordance with the regional
language of this documentation. If you have installed an MUI operating system, certain
designations are still displayed in the base language of the operating system after a language
change and will, therefore, differ from those used in the documentation.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 17
Using SIMATIC PDM
3.4 Contact partner

3.4 Contact partner

Your contact partner (not for demo version)

Questions on SIMATIC STEP 7 / SIMATIC PCS 7 / hardware / SIMATIC PDM / problems with
S7 communication

Mailing address: SIEMENS AG

Customer Support
D-90475 Nuremberg, Germany
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support (http://
www.siemens.com/automation/service&support)

Questions on devices and GSD files

Please get in touch with your contact partner at the device manufacturer.
For more information, refer to the "List of integrated devices". You can find this in the \_manuals
folder on the SIMATIC PDM Device Library 2#2015 DVD.
Follow-up installations and additional information on SIMATIC PDM are available on the
Internet at "www.siemens.com/simatic-pdm (www.siemens.com/simatic-pdm)".

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

18 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Using SIMATIC PDM
3.5 Basis for using intelligent field devices

3.5 Basis for using intelligent field devices

Integration of field devices from different manufacturers into control systems

Device descriptions had to be standardized In order to enable intelligent field devices from
different manufacturers to be integrated into different control systems. This standard (IEC
61804-2) was developed in collaboration with the following organizations:
● PROFIBUS User Organization (PNO)
● Hart Communication Foundation (HCF)
● Fieldbus FOUNDATION (FF)
● OPC Foundation
Device descriptions are based on EDDL (Electronic Device Description Language - standard
IEC 61804-3).

Finding the device description

You can obtain device descriptions in the following ways:
● DVD "Device Library ...":
You obtain this DVD with SIMATIC PDM. The Device Library includes device descriptions
of the HCF library, FF library, PI library and FDI packages.
You can find additional information on this in the pdmbase readme file.
● From the device manufacturer together with the device
● On the Internet
● In the device catalogs of applications that can evaluate data contained in device descriptions
Note
Device descriptions and EDD
Below, only the term "device description" will be used to refer to "EDD" (Electronic Device
Description) and "DD" (Device Description). Exception: The user interface uses the terms
EDD and DD.

Liability
Siemens explicitly declines any liability for damages resulting from the use of the following
device description files and from interaction with the associated devices:
● For device-specific device description files for non-Siemens devices, the Siemens warranty
only applies up to the interface.
● For non-device-specific device description files, such as those that correspond to the
PROFIBUS PA profiles or the HART Universal or Common Practice Commands.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 19
Using SIMATIC PDM
3.5 Basis for using intelligent field devices

● For device description files of the HCF library from the "Device Library" DVD.
● For device description files that were integrated through catalogs.

NOTICE
Important note on the device description files included with the SIMATIC PDM
The device description files of non-Siemens field devices have not been developed by
Siemens and are included with the shipped products free of charge. The licensee is entitled
to use the device description files of these devices in the same manner as a trial license
in accordance with the general terms and conditions for the supply of software for
automation and drive technology. This right of use may be exercised by the licensee as
long as the right of use for the PDM software is in effect.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

20 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Using SIMATIC PDM
3.6 Establishing connections to field devices

3.6 Establishing connections to field devices

Plants use field devices with different communication paths and protocols. The overview shows
a typical connection scenario for the field device groups that are supported by SIMATIC PDM.

Network topologies for PROFIBUS DP

The following figure shows the access paths to field devices for SIMATIC PDM.

3&6 3'0
0DLQWHQDQFH
6WDWLRQ

$FFHVVSDWKV )LHOGGHYLFHV

(WKHUQHW

,(3%OLQN
JDWHZD\

352),%86'3

352),%86'3 352),%86'3
352),%86'3
352),%86'3
5HPRWH,2
'3'3JDWHZD\

+$57
'33$JDWHZD\

352),%863$
352),%863$

'3))JDWHZD\

)281'$7,21)LHOGEXV

)281'$7,21)LHOGEXV

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 21
Using SIMATIC PDM
3.6 Establishing connections to field devices

Network topologies for PROFINET

The following figure shows the access paths to field devices for SIMATIC PDM.

3&6 3'0
0DLQWHQDQFH
6WDWLRQ

$FFHVVURXWHV )LHOGGHYLFHV

(WKHUQHW

352),1(7

352),1(7 352),1(7
5HPRWH,2
352),1(7GHYLFH

+$57

,(3%/LQN '33$FRXSOHU
352),1(7FRQQHFWLRQ
RIILHOGGHYLFHV
352),%863$ YLD,(3%/LQN
([DPSOHIRU
352),%863$

Communication paths

Note
Interface with SIMATIC PDM
The PC shown is always the interface to SIMATIC PDM.
In networks with routing capability, the PC can be connected to a linked network. You can find
information about this in the section "Plant-wide communication by means of routing
(Page 87)".

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

22 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Using SIMATIC PDM
3.6 Establishing connections to field devices

HART modem network

The following figure shows the access paths to field devices for SIMATIC PDM.

+$57PRGHPQHWZRUN

MODBUS network
The following figure shows the access paths to field devices for SIMATIC PDM.

0RGEXV

HART server network

The following figure shows the access paths to field devices for SIMATIC PDM.

PDM ES PDM

PROFIBUS DP
HART
Ethernet

Remote I/O

HART-Multiplexer Wireless
HART

IE/WSN-
PA LINK

Supported networks
With this version of SIMATIC PDM, field devices are supported on the following networks:
● PROFIBUS DP network (including subordinate Foundation Fieldbus)
● PROFIBUS PA network
● PROFINET

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 23
Using SIMATIC PDM
3.6 Establishing connections to field devices

● MODBUS network
● HART modem network
● HART server

Activating PDM functions

License keys are required to use SIMATIC PDM. You can expand the SIMATIC PDM functions
by adding optional packages. You can find information about this in the section "Product
packages for SIMATIC PDM (Page 25)".

Additional information
Section "Inserting devices (Page 92)"

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

24 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Using SIMATIC PDM
3.7 Product structure

3.7 Product structure

3.7.1 Product packages for SIMATIC PDM

Legend for the table:

● Product component is part of the product package.

○ Optional product component for the product package; obtainable as add-on
- Product component is not relevant for the product package or not available
1)
TAG definition (see "SIMATIC PDM TAG" in the section "Options (Page 27)")
2)
As of SIMATIC PDM V9.0, the license key for the "SIMATIC PDM Routing" add-on
package is no longer used. Licensing for S7 DSGW is made via "SIMATIC PDM
TAG".
You can find information about this in the section "Options (Page 27)".
3)
Only for special applications, not intended for wide-spread use: Use requires pro‐
gramming skills.

Components Product packages

SIMATIC PDM stand-alone SIMATIC PDM system integrated
Minimum Basic con‐ Server Application-specific configurations
configura‐ figuration
tion
SIMATIC SIMATIC SIMATIC SIMATIC SIMATIC SIMATIC PDM PCS 7
PDM Sin‐ PDM Ba‐ PDM PDM PDM S7
gle Point sic stand- Service
alone
server
V9.1 V9.1 V9.1 V9.1 V9.1 V9.1 Server FF V9.1
V9.1
SIMATIC PDM TAG 1 4 100 4 + 50 4 + 100 4 + 100 4 + 100 4 + 100
(license included in
scope of delivery1))
SIMATIC PDM extension options

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 25
Using SIMATIC PDM
3.7 Product structure

Components Product packages

SIMATIC PDM stand-alone SIMATIC PDM system integrated
Minimum Basic con‐ Server Application-specific configurations
configura‐ figuration
tion
SIMATIC SIMATIC SIMATIC SIMATIC SIMATIC SIMATIC PDM PCS 7
PDM Sin‐ PDM Ba‐ PDM PDM PDM S7
gle Point sic stand- Service
alone
server
V9.1 V9.1 V9.1 V9.1 V9.1 V9.1 Server FF V9.1
V9.1
Count Rel‐ ● 10 Not ex‐ ○2) ○ ○2) ○ ○ ○ ○
evant Li‐ TAGs pandable
censes
● 100
(cumula‐ (can only
TAGs
tive) be used
● 1000 for a sin‐
TAGs gle device
SIMATIC PDM Basic and can‐ ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
not be ex‐
SIMATIC PDM Exten‐ tended ○ ● ○ ● ● ● ●
ded with other
SIMATIC PDM Integra‐ options) ○ ● ○ ● ● ● ●
tion in STEP 7 / PCS 7
SIMATIC PDM Rout‐ ○2) ● ○2) ○ ● ● ●
ing2)
SIMATIC PDM Server ○ ● ○ ○ ○ ● ○
SIMATIC PDM FOUN‐ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ●
DATION Fieldbus
HCF HART Server ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
SIMATIC PDM Com‐ ○ - ○ - - - -
mand Service3)

Note
Devices subject to licensing
SIMATIC PDM only displays devices if a TAG license is installed for each device subject to
licensing.
● Licenses are only required for devices that are subject to licensing.
● No licenses are required for remote I/O modules and channels.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

26 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Using SIMATIC PDM
3.7 Product structure

3.7.2 Options

Add-ons for SIMATIC PDM subject to licensing

Note
SIMATIC PDM Single Point
● SIMATIC PDM Single Point can only be used for a single device.
● SIMATIC PDM Single Point cannot be extended with other functional or TAG options.

You can purchase the following options for SIMATIC PDM:

● SIMATIC PDM TAG
Note
Note TAG licenses
Maintenance projects use no TAG licenses; they only reserve TAG licenses. Multiprojects
or other projects use TAG licenses.
If you want to use more TAGs for each multiproject or project than those provided in the
standard package, the TAG options of SIMATIC PDM enable you to expand the TAGs to
the required number. By combining multiple license keys, you can reach the required
number of devices for licensing (TAG addition). See section "Establishing connections to
field devices (Page 21)".
The "SIMATIC PDM Routing" option is not included in the SIMATIC PDM stand-alone
product package. Licensing for use of the S7 DSGW (data record gateway) for gateways
from the plant bus (Ethernet) to field buses (PROFIBUS) is performed via TAG licenses.
TAG licenses are booked depending on the quantity according to the following rules:
– 10 TAG: per S7 DSGW with one PROFIBUS subnet
– 20 TAG: per S7 DSGW with more than one PROFIBUS subnet
– 10 TAG: per IE/PB link
– 0 TAG: for Ethernet or PROFINET networks
● SIMATIC PDM Extended
This option licenses and enables the use of the following additional functions:
– Import and export of parameter sets and project structures
– Print
– Document Manager
– Extended functionality of the LifeList
– Change log
– Calibration log for each field device
– Configuration of three time intervals (maintenance, servicing, calibration) for each field
device

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 27
Using SIMATIC PDM
3.7 Product structure

● SIMATIC PDM integration in STEP 7 (PCS 7)

This option allows field devices and their associated networks to be configured using the
STEP 7 hardware configurator (HW Config).
Note
The combination of SIMATIC PDM and the option "Integration in STEP 7" is referred to as
SIMATIC PDM integrated in this documentation.

● SIMATIC PDM Routing

This option licenses and enables the use of the following gateways:
– Communication via an automation system which serves as a gateway
– Communication between Ethernet and PROFIBUS
– Communication between PROFINET and PROFIBUS
This option is not required for the following applications:
– For a PROFIBUS to PROFIBUS gateway
– For a PROFIBUS to HART gateway
– For a PROFINET to HART gateway
– For the SIMATIC PDM stand-alone product package
● SIMATIC PDM Server
This option licenses and enables the following applications:
– Accessing functions of SIMATIC PDM using a browser
– Access with a maintenance client to the configuration interface of SIMATIC PDM for the
selected field device
– Enables SIMATIC PDM start on each client of the PCS 7 maintenance station and
access to functions of SIMATIC PDM using a browser.
● SIMATIC PDM Client
This option licenses and enables access to the SIMATIC PDM Server via a browser on a
separate PC station. The required data must be provided by the SIMATIC PDM Server.
● SIMATIC PDM FOUNDATION Fieldbus
This option licenses and enables configuration and communication of field devices on the
FOUNDATION Fieldbus in SIMATIC STEP 7 and SIMATIC PCS 7 projects.
● HCF HART Server
This option licenses and enables the use of the HCF HART Server and thereby HART
multiplexers with connected HART field devices and wireless HART field devices.
● SIMATIC PDM Command Service
This option licenses and enables integration of SIMATIC PDM in additional automation
systems. SIMATIC PDM projects and objects can be edited and operated through the
associated interface. The use of this interface requires advanced programming skills.
If you want to use these interfaces, contact your Siemens representative.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

28 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Using SIMATIC PDM
3.7 Product structure

● SIMATIC PDM Logon

This option licenses and enables the use of the user management for the SIMATIC PDM
Server.
● SIMATIC Logon
This option licenses and enables the use of SIMATIC Logon.
Note
The "SIMATIC Logon" option requires licenses for the following applications:
● SIMATIC PDM stand-alone
● SIMATIC PDM integrated in STEP 7
No separate license is necessary within SIMATIC PCS 7.

3.7.3 Delivery contents

Scope of delivery
Information about the software packages that are delivered with SIMATIC PDM can be found
in the pdmbase-readme file.

Device libraries
Information on the devices contained in the SIMATIC PDM device libraries can be found:
● On the Internet pages of the device manufacturers
The updated versions of the device libraries and the HCF catalog are available in
publications on the Internet.
● On the "SIMATIC PDM Device Library ..." DVD in the _manuals
\PI_Library_Documentation folder > in the "index.html" file
Liability

Note
Read the information in the section "Basis for using intelligent field devices (Page 19)".

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 29
Using SIMATIC PDM
3.7 Product structure

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

30 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
Installation 4
4.1 Compatibility
PDM V9.1 is compatible with STEP7 V5.6 and PCS 7 V9.0.
PCS 7 V8.0.2 is supported without the SIMATIC PDM FF option.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 31
Installation
4.2 Preparing SIMATIC PDM

4.2 Preparing SIMATIC PDM

Requirement
● SIMATIC PDM is installed.
You can find information on this in the section "Installing SIMATIC PDM (Page 33)"
● Project settings have been made.
You can find information on this in the section ""Options" menu (Page 256)".
● The settings have been made for the fieldbus interfaces.
● Field device planning has been completed.
You can find information on this in the section "Establishing connections to field devices
(Page 21)"
● The device description files for the field devices used within a plant have been integrated
into SIMATIC PDM. You can find information on this in the section "Integrating device
descriptions (Page 51)".
Recommendation:
Hardware has been prepared (configuration, power supply, network connections).

Additional information
● For additional information on assigning a network, refer to the section "Setting the interface
on the computer (Page 87)".
● For information on the particular issues relating to the distributed I/O, refer to the section
"Modular PROFIBUS device (remote I/O) (Page 111)".

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

32 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Installation
4.3 Installing SIMATIC PDM

4.3 Installing SIMATIC PDM

SIMATIC PDM must be installed before it can be started. The software package contains all
SIMATIC PDM software. Depending on the use scenario, you only need to install certain
applications.

Licensing
In order to use the software you will need product-specific license keys (license agreements),
which you install with the Automation License Manager.
You can transfer the required license keys either prior to or following the installation. You can
find additional information on this in the online help for the Automation License Manager.

Requirements
● The operating system has been installed.
● No version of SIMATIC PDM has been installed.
● All communications processors have been installed in the PC.
● You have administrator rights on the PC station.
If you install the software in a domain, be aware of group policies or other restrictions that may
hinder the installation. Consult the appropriate Administrator as regards these settings and the
required approvals and permissions.

Note
Display of the dialog elements
Dialog elements of SIMATIC PDM are only displayed correctly when the display settings in
Windows are set to 100%. Bigger or smaller scaling lead to display errors.

Calling the setup program

1. Insert the program CD into the drive.
2. Double-click on "Setup.exe" to start the setup.
Note
Checking the installation requirements
The setup program automatically checks whether the software components needed for the
installation are already installed on the PC.
● Read the latest information about installation and the software and hardware
requirements in the pdmbase-readme file on the program CD.
● If any software components are missing, a message informs you of this. The setup
program is terminated after the message is confirmed . The setup will start again after
you have installed the missing software components.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 33
Installation
4.3 Installing SIMATIC PDM

Settings in the setup

Below you will find information on the settings made in the setup dialog boxes, listed in the
order in which they are processed:
1. Setup language
– e.g. "English" and "Next"
2. Welcome
– "Next"
3. Product information
– Read this if needed and "Next"
4. License agreement
– Select the check box "I accept the conditions of the above license agreement as well
as the conditions of the Open Source license agreement. I confirm that I have read and
understood the security information".
– "Next"
5. Setup type
– Activate the "Install" check box and "Next".
6. User information
– Enter the user information and click "Next".
7. Programs
– The options installed on the PC for this selection are listed in the display window.
Select the add-ons you want to use and for which you have licenses or will later acquire.
"Next"

Add-ons Required for:

SIMATIC PDM FOUNDATION Fieldbus Configuring and/or monitoring FF devices
SIMATIC PDM Command Service Integrating SIMATIC PDM in automation sys‐
tems
Note: Not required for SIMATIC PCS 7
SIMATIC PDM Server Accessing functions of SIMATIC PDM via
browsers or faceplates
SIMATIC PDM Logon Managing users for SIMATIC PDM Server
SIMATIC Logon Managing users for SIMATIC PDM and SIMAT‐
IC PDM Server
HCF HART Server Using HCF HART Server and HART compo‐
nents

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

34 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Installation
4.3 Installing SIMATIC PDM

8. System settings
System settings are required for problem-free operation of SIMATIC PDM.
Note
Required system settings
● The settings in the exception list of the Windows firewall are applied to the area of the
local network (subnet). If your PC stations are located in different networks (subnets),
you need to change this area.
● The settings in the exception list of the Windows firewall are made when the Windows
firewall is disabled.
● You can open the "Security Controller" dialog box again. To do this, select the following
in the Start menu, Siemens SIMATIC programs: Security > Security Controller

9. Ready to install the selection.

"Install" - The installation is performed.
Close the dialog box when the installation is complete.
10.Reboot the PC.

Device descriptions of field devices used

Following the installation of SIMATIC PDM, integrate the required device descriptions (EDD)
for the field devices used.
You can find information on this in the following sections:
● Section "Integrating devices into SIMATIC PDM (Page 41)"
● Section "Integrating device descriptions (Page 51)"

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 35
Installation
4.4 Setting the language

4.4 Setting the language

Changing the language

1. In SIMATIC Manager, select the menu command Options > Settings…
.The "Settings" dialog box opens.
2. Open the "Language" tab. You can change the language on this tab page.
3. Select the language you want to work with in the "National language" field.
Note
SIMATIC PDM language versions
The drop-down list contains the languages in which SIMATIC Manager is installed.
If you select a language for which there is no matching SIMATIC PDM language version
installed on the given computer, "English" is set automatically.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

36 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Installation
4.5 Reinstalling / Removing SIMATIC PDM

4.5 Reinstalling / Removing SIMATIC PDM

Note
Observe the information on dealing with license keys, which can be found in:
● File pdmbase-readme
● Help for the Automation License Manager

Reinstalling
Reinstallation over the top of an existing SIMATIC PDM version is not possible. Remove
SIMATIC PDM prior to installing the new version.

Note
Device descriptions
Following a new installation, the required device description must be integrated again.
The device descriptions included with SIMATIC PDM are available on the "Device Library"
DVD.
You know the storage locations of additionally used device descriptions.
You can find information about integrating the device descriptions in the section "Integrating
devices into SIMATIC PDM (Page 41)".

Removing
To remove SIMATIC PDM, use the Windows system function for removing programs.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 37
Installation
4.5 Reinstalling / Removing SIMATIC PDM

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

38 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
PDM Exportfile Converter 5
5.1 "PDM Exportfile Converter" dialog box
In the "PDM Exportfile Converter" dialog, you can convert export files from older PDM versions,
enabling them to be imported into PDM again.
The export files from PDM versions V6.x and V7.x cannot be imported directly into SIMATIC
PDM as of V8.0.
To enable importing of existing export files, the "old" export files are converted.
A structure file is generated in this case and stored along with the associated parameter import
files in the corresponding subdirectory generated by the converter. These files can then be
imported.

Note
During export in V6.x, you must ensure that the set SIMATIC Manager language matches the
set system language of the computer. For example, when the character format is en-EN and
the language is English.

Source-File
Navigate to the desired directory in the file system containing the export files to be converted.
After the dialog is closed with OK and an export file is correctly selected, the structure it contains
is displayed in the converter.

Destination-Dir
Navigate to the desired directory in the file system where the converted files are to be stored.

"Convert" button
Click "Convert". The selected source file is converted.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 39
PDM Exportfile Converter
5.1 "PDM Exportfile Converter" dialog box

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

40 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
Integrating devices into SIMATIC PDM 6
6.1 Device Integration Manager
The field devices can only be configured if the device descriptions that are suitable for the field
devices have been integrated into SIMATIC PDM. The Device Integration Manager is the
SIMATIC PDM function for integrating device descriptions.

Liability
Siemens explicitly declines any liability for damages resulting from the use of the following
device descriptions and use in conjunction with the associated devices:
● For device-specific device descriptions for non-Siemens devices, the Siemens warranty
only applies up to the interface.
● For non-device-specific device descriptions,
such as device descriptions that correspond to the PROFIBUS PA profiles or the HART
universal or common practice commands.
● For device descriptions of the HCF library, FF library, and PI library from the "Device
Library ..." DVD.

NOTICE
Important information about the device descriptions included with the SIMATIC PDM
The device descriptions of non-Siemens field devices were not developed by Siemens
and are included with the shipped products free of charge. The licensee is entitled to use
the device descriptions of these devices in the same manner as a trial license in
accordance with the general terms and conditions for the supply of software for automation
and drive technology. This right of use may be exercised by the licensee as long as the
right of use for the PDM software is in effect.

Starting the Device Integration Manager

1. In the Windows Start menu under the Siemens SIMATIC programs, select the SIMATIC
PDM > Device Integration Manager menu command.
The "Device Integration Manager" dialog opens.
2. Read the license agreement.
You must accept the license agreement in order to be able to work with the Device
Integration Manager .
3. Click the "I accept the license agreement" button.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 41
Integrating devices into SIMATIC PDM
6.2 "Device Integration Manager" main window

6.2 "Device Integration Manager" main window

Introduction
The "Device Integration Manager" main window remains on the screen throughout the work
session and is partially or totally covered by other activated dialog windows.

The main window has the following layout

Title bar (Page 43) The product name is displayed.
Menu bar (Page 43) You access the functions of the Device Integration Manager via the
menu bar.
Toolbar (Page 44) The toolbar enables certain menu commands to be accessed quick‐
ly.
Source folder (Page 48) The "Source folder" box shows the storage location in which device
descriptions are or were searched for.
Applying a filter (Page 49) You can apply filters to reduce the amount of information displayed
in the device list.
Applying a project filter Only those devices that are used in the selected project and for
(Page 63) / Applying Filter File which an identical version has not yet been integrated are selected
(Page 63) for integration.
Device list (Page 46) The device list displays information on devices that have been read
in or integrated.
Status bar (Page 48) Contains information on processes currently being performed.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

42 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Integrating devices into SIMATIC PDM
6.3 Views

6.3 Views

6.3.1 Title bar

The title bar shows the name "Device Integration Manager".

6.3.2 Menu bar

Structure
Below you will find an overview of the Device Integration Manager menus.

Menu Submenu Function

File ● Read device descriptions Select the storage location of the device descriptions to be read in.
from source directory Set the path to the device descriptions or navigate to the location.
(Page 57)
● Read device descriptions Select the storage location of the compressed device descriptions to be read in.
from compressed source Set the path and the file name for compressed device descriptions or navigate
(Page 57) to the location.
● List of integrated device The device descriptions integrated in the PC are read in to the device list.
descriptions (Page 58)
● List of device descriptions The device descriptions used in the STEP 7 project are displayed.
used (Page 58)
● Save device list (Page 59) The displayed information of the current device list is saved.
Specify the storage location and file name for the file in which the device list is
to be saved.
● Print device list (Page 59) The device list is sent to the selected printer.
● Deleting the device list The displayed device list is emptied.
(Page 60) Application example:
Clearing the device list before reading in device descriptions again.
● Exit (Page 60) Closes the Device Integration Manager.
View ● Split device list window The device list window is split or the split is removed.
(Page 60)

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 43
Integrating devices into SIMATIC PDM
6.3 Views

Menu Submenu Function

Catalog ● Complete device If the software detects that relevant information is missing in a device description
information (Page 61) during its import, the "Device info incomplete" icon appears in the status column
of the device list.
If you select an affected device in the device list, you can then complete the
device information in a dialog.
● Integrate (Page 62) The device descriptions are integrated into SIMATIC PDM for those devices
selected in the device list.
Requirement:
The check box for the required device is selected in the "Path" column of the
device list.
● Creating user-specific Your own device library is created.
device DVD (Page 62) Device libraries that were created in this way can be copied, compressed or
burned to DVD. These libraries can be read in and integrated with the Device
Integration Manager just like the SIMATIC PDM DVD "Device Library …".
● Applying Filter File Select a filter file (previously saved device list) according to which the currently
(Page 63) displayed device list is to be filtered.
● Applying a project filter Select a project or multiproject to filter the currently displayed device list for
(Page 63) components used in the project.
● Remove Filter File/Project Filtering by means of a filter file or project filter is stopped.
Filter (Page 63)
● Messages (Page 64) The "Messages" dialog box opens.
● Find (Page 65) The "Find" dialog window opens.
? ● Help (Page 65) Opens the help for SIMATIC PDM.
● Info (Page 66) The following information is displayed:
● SIMATIC PDM version
● Information about the "Device Integration Manager" component

Additional information
Use SIMATIC Manager to make the settings for the Device Integration Manager.
You can find information on this in the following sections:
● Setting the language: Section Options > "Settings (Page 256)"
● Section Options > SIMATIC PDM > Settings > "Device Integration Manager" tab
(Page 261)

6.3.3 Toolbar
The toolbar is located below the menu bar and contains a number of icons with which you can
quickly perform frequently used menu commands without having to open a menu and select
the command.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

44 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Integrating devices into SIMATIC PDM
6.3 Views

Icons
Meanings of the icons used:

Icon Menu command Description

Read device descriptions Select the storage location of the device descriptions to
from source directory be read in.
(Page 57) Set the path to the device descriptions or navigate to the
location.
Read device descriptions Select the storage location of the compressed device de‐
from compressed source scriptions to be read in.
(Page 57) Set the path and the file name for compressed device de‐
scriptions or navigate to the location.
Integrate (Page 62) The device descriptions are integrated into SIMATIC PDM
for those devices selected in the device list.
Print device list (Page 59) The device list is sent to the selected printer.

Deleting the device list The displayed device list is emptied.

(Page 60) Application example:
Clearing the device list before reading in device descrip‐
tions again.
List of integrated device The device descriptions integrated in the PC are read in
descriptions (Page 58) to the device list.
List of device descriptions The device descriptions used in the STEP 7 project are
used (Page 58) displayed.
Creating user-specific de‐ Your own device library is created.
vice DVD (Page 62)
Save device list (Page 59) The displayed information of the current device list is
saved.
Specify the storage location and file name for the file in
which you want the device list to be saved.
Applying Filter File Select a filter file (previously saved device list) according
(Page 63) to which the currently displayed device list is to be filtered.
Applying a project filter Select a project or multiproject to filter the device list for
(Page 63) components used in the project.
Split device list window The device list window is split or the split is removed once
(Page 60) again.
Messages (Page 64) The "Messages" dialog box opens.

Using the Find function The displayed device list is searched.

(Page 65) Open the "Find" dialog box. Enter a character string and
specify the search options.
Help (Page 65) The SIMATIC PDM help opens.

6.3.4 Device list

The device list in the "Device Integration Manager" dialog window contains tabular information
on device descriptions and devices that can be interpreted by SIMATIC PDM with a device
description.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 45
Integrating devices into SIMATIC PDM
6.3 Views

Columns

Column Description
Path Tree structure - The devices with device description are displayed in a hierarchical structure
(catalog path).
Flat structure - The devices with device description are displayed without a hierarchical
structure.
The devices are displayed in a hierarchical structure when you click the "Path" column
header for sorting.
The devices are displayed in a flat structure when you click the header of any other column
(except "Path").
● Select the check boxes for the devices whose device descriptions are to be integrated.
Communication
Folder for device classes (actuator/sensor etc.)
Manufacturer
Device type, Component, Device version, Variant
Device name Device name
Manufacturer Manufacturer
Communication Communication type for the connection to the field device
Device class Catalog position (object name)
New version Version of the device description which was read in from a device description library
Integrated version EDD source version
Integrated on Installation date of the installed EDD
Description Attribute from device file
Type ID ID of the device type
GSD file Names of the GSD files
New DD revision Revision of the device description file of the imported device package
Integrated DD revision Revision of the device description file of the integrated device package
New device revision Device revision of the device with which the imported device package is compatible.
Integrated device revision Device revision of the device with which the integrated device package is compatible.
Device library Version number of the device DVD from which the device package was imported during
integration
If the device package was supplied as a single package, this column is empty.
Additional information may be displayed.
● You can select the columns to be displayed in the SIMATIC Manager using the following menu command: Options >
SIMATIC PDM > Settings... .
● You will find additional information on this topic in section "Device Integration Manager" tab (Page 261).

Status icons of the device description

Table 6-1 Meaning of icons before the status of the device description integration

Icon Meaning
Not (yet) integrated

Device info incomplete

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

46 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Integrating devices into SIMATIC PDM
6.3 Views

Icon Meaning
An identical or newer device description is integrated.

The device description is in the process of being integrated.

The device description has been integrated successfully.

The device description is used in the project but neither read in nor integrated.

Error; Observe the error details in the message window.

Warning; Observe the warning details in the message window.

Table 6-2 Meaning of icons after the device descriptions have been read in and before they have
been integrated

Icon Meaning
The device description has been read in without any errors but has not yet been inte‐
grated.
The device information is incomplete in the imported device description. The device
description cannot be integrated correctly.
You can find information on correcting this in the section "Completing a device descrip‐
tion (Page 52)".
An identical or newer version of the device description is integrated.

The device description is in the process of being integrated.

The device description has been integrated successfully.

Errors occurred while reading in the device description. The device description cannot
be integrated.
For details regarding the error messages, see the message window.
Warnings generated. The device description has been read in and can be integrated.

Table 6-3 Meaning of the icons after integration of the device description

Icon Meaning
The device description has not been integrated because the user did not select it for
integration.
The device description was not integrated because an identical or a newer version was
already installed.
The device description has been successfully integrated without errors.

The device description has been successfully integrated without errors. Warnings or
errors occurred during the semantics check.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 47
Integrating devices into SIMATIC PDM
6.3 Views

Icon Meaning
An attempt was made to integrate the device description. The device description could
not be integrated due to an error.
● Error messages:
For details, please refer to the message window.
● Potential cause: Device information incomplete during integration.
The device description has been integrated. The warnings indicate potential inconsis‐
tencies.

Sorting
You can sort the contents of the table. Click on the cell in the header of the column based on
which the contents should be sorted. Clicking on this cell again changes the sorting direction
(ascending/descending).

6.3.5 Status bar

The status bar is located at the bottom of the main window. It displays the number of read in
or integrated device descriptions.

6.3.6 Source folder

The Source folder box is located underneath the toolbar. You use this box to select the path
in which the device descriptions are located. The device list is created based on the device
descriptions.
The source can be:

Icon Meaning
Folder

Compressed file (*.zip)

Device description file (*.xml)

The Source folder box gives you the option to display the history of the directories so far. Click
the drop-down list icon on the right side of the box to display the last ten sources.

Changing the source folder

Procedure
1. Click the "Find folder" icon.
The "Change source folder" dialog box opens.
2. Navigate to the required directory in the file system.
3. Click "OK".
Alternatively, you can enter the path in the text box.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

48 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Integrating devices into SIMATIC PDM
6.3 Views

All compressed files included in the selected source directory are searched for the device
descriptions. Compressed files within a compressed file are also taken into consideration.

6.3.7 Applying a filter

The "Filter" box is located underneath the "Source folder" box. You can filter for up to three
strings of your choice (filters 1, 2 and 3) simultaneously. When the filter is applied, all devices
that include all specified strings in their device description are displayed. A distinction is not
made between uppercase and lowercase letters.

Procedure
1. Click in the text box "Filter 1", "Filter 2" or "Filter 3".
2. Enter the required search term.
3. Confirm your entry with the "Enter" key.
The device list is searched for the search terms and updated.
Each input box gives you the option to display the history of the search terms so far.
● Click the drop-down list icon to the right of the text box to display the history.
● To disable individual filters, click on the of the respective filter.

Note
The filter (text boxes, filter files, project filter) does not only affect the display. The selections
of all devices excluded by the filter are removed and no longer set when the filter is disabled.

See also
Applying a project filter (Page 63)
Remove Filter File/Project Filter (Page 63)
Applying Filter File (Page 63)

6.3.8 Filter file/Project filter

The "Filter file/Project filter" box is located underneath the "Source folder" box. It is only
displayed when you use a filter file or the project filter.
The devices that match the data of the filter file or are contained in the project file are displayed
when the filter is applied.

Applying a filter
The procedure for applying a filter file or a project filter is described under Filter file (Page 63)
or Project filter (Page 63).

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 49
Integrating devices into SIMATIC PDM
6.3 Views

See also
Remove Filter File/Project Filter (Page 63)

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

50 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Integrating devices into SIMATIC PDM
6.4 Working with the Device Integration Manager

6.4 Working with the Device Integration Manager

6.4.1 Integrating device descriptions

The Device Integration Manager is the SIMATIC PDM function for integrating device
descriptions.

Device descriptions of the "Device Library" DVD

Make sure the device descriptions are always integrated in SIMATIC PDM from the "Device
Library" DVD provided with your version of SIMATIC PDM. Changes in the device descriptions
and the catalog structure may exist between the different versions.

Note
FOUNDATION Fieldbus
The SIMATIC PDM option "FOUNDATION Fieldbus" must be installed to integrate device
descriptions for devices on FOUNDATION Fieldbus.
You can find information on this in section "Installing SIMATIC PDM (Page 33)"

Upgrading SIMATIC PDM

Note
Checking for all device types used in the project
After integrating the device descriptions, you need to check the assignment of the device
description (by opening the parameter assignment interface once).

Procedure
1. Close all SIMATIC programs that are open on the PDM PC.
2. Go to the Windows Start menu and select the menu command SIMATIC PDM > Device
Integration Manager under the Siemens SIMATIC programs.
You must accept the license agreement to be able to use the Device Integration Manager .
3. Select the File > Read device descriptions from source directory... or File > Read device
descriptions from compressed source... menu command.
4. Navigate to the folder with the device descriptions in the tree structure.
Note
"Device Library" DVD
The "Device Library" DVD is supplied with SIMATIC PDM. Select the drive containing the
DVD.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 51
Integrating devices into SIMATIC PDM
6.4 Working with the Device Integration Manager

5. Click the "OK" button.

The device descriptions found are displayed in the "Devices" list.
You can find additional information on this in the section "Device list (Page 45)".
6. Select the check boxes for the devices whose device descriptions are to be integrated. The
check box is automatically selected for devices that have not been integrated or have been
integrated with an older version. You can work with a split device list window (Page 60).
7. Select the Catalog > Integration... menu command.
The device descriptions are transferred to the PC.
Note
During the device description integration
Do not open any SIMATIC programs until the device description integration has completed.

Completing the information for a device description

If information is missing from a device description, e.g., regarding the classification, you can
add this information yourself. You can find information on this in the section "Completing a
device description (Page 52)".

Additional information
● Section "Delivery contents (Page 29)"
● Section "Messages (Page 55)"
● Section "Checking the device integration (Page 88)"
● Section "Replacing devices (Page 121)"

6.4.2 Completing a device description

If the software detects that information is missing in a device description during its import, the
"Device info incomplete" icon appears in the status column of the device list.

Recommendation:
Each device description marked in this way should be completed before it is integrated in
SIMATIC PDM.

Note
Completing device information at a later date
If you need to complete any device information at a later date then please follow the procedure
below.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

52 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Integrating devices into SIMATIC PDM
6.4 Working with the Device Integration Manager

Procedure
1. Select an incomplete device description and then select the Complete device
information... command in the shortcut menu.
2. Complete the device description.
3. Click "OK".
Note
Saving the changes
● If the device description is located on a read-only medium, changes cannot be made.
In this case, copy the device description to a medium that is not write-protected and
start the process again.
● The changes will remain available in the Device Integration Manager until the dialog box
is closed. When you click the "OK" button, the changes are applied to the device
description.

4. Click "Integrate".
The integration of the device description is performed.

Additional information
You can find information on the device list entries in the section "Device list (Page 45)".

6.4.3 Creating your own device library using the project filter

Introduction
You use the following procedure to create your own device library using the project filter.

Project filter
Information on the project filter and its application is available in the section "Applying a project
filter (Page 63)".

Procedure
1. Read in the device descriptions of a standard library.
2. Apply a project filter.
3. Select the Catalog > Creating user-specific device DVD... menu command.
4. Enter the destination path in the "Create own device library... " dialog box.
5. Enter the device library name or the version identification of the device library.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 53
Integrating devices into SIMATIC PDM
6.4 Working with the Device Integration Manager

Note
Devices without help files
If you are using a device without help files, you can integrate the help files at a later time. To
do this, answer the "Missing Help Files" dialog box with "Yes".

Additional information
● Section "Integrating device descriptions (Page 51)"
● Section "Basis for using intelligent field devices (Page 19)"

6.4.4 Creating your own device library from a collection of device descriptions
You use the following procedure to create your own device library from a collection of device
descriptions.

Collection of device descriptions

You can find information about the availability of device descriptions and their application in
the section "Basis for using intelligent field devices (Page 19)".

Procedure
1. Read in the device descriptions of a standard library.
2. Select the check box for the device descriptions that you need in your own device library.
3. Select the Catalog > Creating user-specific device DVD... menu command.
4. Enter the destination path in the "Create own device library... " dialog box.
5. Enter the device library name or the version identification of the device library.

Note
Devices without help files
If you are using a device without help files, you can integrate the help files at a later time. To
do this, answer the "Missing Help Files" dialog box with "Yes".

Additional information
Section "Integrating device descriptions (Page 51)"

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

54 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Integrating devices into SIMATIC PDM
6.4 Working with the Device Integration Manager

6.4.5 Removing device descriptions

Shortcut menu
If you select objects in the list of integrated device descriptions, you can use the shortcut menu
to remove the device description:
Removing integrated device descriptions
Delete the selected objects from the list of integrated device descriptions via this menu
command. The selected objects are also deleted from the catalog.

6.4.6 Update / upgrade of device descriptions (EDD update)

Procedure
1. Check the version of the integrated device descriptions.
You can find information on this in the section "Device list (Page 45)".
2. Read in the new device descriptions and compare the new version with the integrated
version.
You can find information on this in the section "Read device descriptions from source
directory (Page 57)".
3. Select the required device descriptions and integrate the device descriptions. The check
box is automatically selected for devices that have not been integrated or have been
integrated with an older version.
Information on this is available in the section "Integrating device descriptions (Page 51)".

See also
Download to device (Page 231)

6.4.7 Messages

Message log
If errors occur during the actions or in the application of the Device Integration Manager, they
are shown in the message log. The message log opens automatically when a warning or an
error has occurred, but it can also be opened manually from any node in the device list. In this
case, all messages of the nodes under this in the hierarchical order are displayed.

Additional information
Section "Message log (Page 156)"

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 55
Integrating devices into SIMATIC PDM
6.4 Working with the Device Integration Manager

6.4.8 Checking syntax and semantics.

You have two ways to check the syntax and semantics:
1. During the integration of the packages in the "Device Integration Manager".
2. After integration of the packages in the "Device Integration Manager" in the device list using
the Check Syntax and Semantics shortcut menu.

Starting the check of syntax and semantics via the shortcut menu
1. Start the Device Integration Manager.
2. Select the menu command File > Menu > List of integrated device descriptions.
3. Select the desired device description or device descriptions.
4. In the shortcut menu, select the command Check Syntax and Semantics.
The syntax and semantics are checked.
Warnings and errors are displayed in the message log.

Possible results of the check

After the check, the results are indicated in the "Status" shown column by a symbol (Page 45).

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

56 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Integrating devices into SIMATIC PDM
6.5 Menus and dialog boxes

6.5 Menus and dialog boxes

6.5.1 File

6.5.1.1 Read device descriptions from source directory

Before devices can be configured in SIMATIC PDM, the associated device description files
need to be read in using the Device Integration Manager.

Requirement
The storage paths of the device description files can be accessed.

Procedure
1. Select the menu command File > Read device description files from source directory ....
In the tree structure, navigate to the storage path where the device description files are
saved.
2. Click "OK".
The device description files are read in.
Note
If the compressed file is password-protected, a dialog appears for entering a password.

Shortcut menu
If you select objects in the list of read in device descriptions, you will find the following via the
object-dependent shortcut menu commands below:
● Messages (Page 55)
Open the message log via this menu command.
● Complete device information (Page 61)
Open the "Complete device information..." dialog via this menu command.

6.5.1.2 Read device descriptions from compressed source

Introduction
Before devices can be configured in SIMATIC PDM, the associated device description files
need to be read in using the Device Integration Manager.

Requirement
The storage paths of the device description files can be accessed.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 57
Integrating devices into SIMATIC PDM
6.5 Menus and dialog boxes

Procedure
1. Select the File > Read device description files from compressed source ... menu command.
2. In the tree structure, navigate to the storage path of the device description files.
3. Click "OK".
The device description files are read in.
Note
If the compressed file is password-protected, a dialog appears for entering a password.

Shortcut menu
If you select objects in the list of read in device descriptions, you will find the following object-
dependent shortcut menu commands:
● Messages (Page 55)
You use this menu command to open the message log.
● Complete device information (Page 61)
You use this menu command to open the "Complete device information..." dialog.

6.5.1.3 List of integrated device descriptions

Displaying the device list

Displays the devices for which a device description file is saved on the PC.

Shortcut menu
If you select objects in the list of integrated device descriptions, you will find the following object-
dependent shortcut menu commands:
● Messages (Page 64)
You use this menu command to open the message log.
● Remove integrated device description(s) (Page 55)
You use this menu command to delete selected objects from the list of integrated device
descriptions.

See also
Complete device information (Page 61)

6.5.1.4 List of device descriptions used

Displaying the device list

Display of the devices used in the project.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

58 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Integrating devices into SIMATIC PDM
6.5 Menus and dialog boxes

The status column (Page 45) indicates whether or not the corresponding device description is
integrated on the computer.
If you select a STEP 7 multiproject, all projects are always displayed, even when only a
subproject is selected in the dialog box.

Shortcut menu
If you select objects in the list of integrated device descriptions, you will find the following object-
dependent shortcut menu commands:
● Messages (Page 64)
You use this menu command to open the message log.
● Remove integrated device description(s) (Page 55)
You use this menu command to delete selected objects from the list of integrated device
descriptions.

See also
Complete device information (Page 61)

6.5.1.5 Save device list

Saving the device list

Specify the storage location and file name for the file in which you want the device list to be
saved.

6.5.1.6 Print device list

You can print the device list that is currently being displayed.

Setting the printer options

Note
● The printer options depend on your computer's operating system and on the printer being
used.
● The file is sent to the default printer.
● If the printout has more than one page, two periods are printed after the page number in
the bottom right corner of the page. The last page does not have these periods, indicating
no more pages are to follow.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 59
Integrating devices into SIMATIC PDM
6.5 Menus and dialog boxes

Procedure
1. Select the menu command File > Print device list or click the "Print" button.
The "Print" dialog box opens.
2. Select the required options.
3. Click "OK".

6.5.1.7 Deleting the device list

Clearing the displayed device list.

Example of application
Clearing the device list before reading in device descriptions again.

6.5.1.8 Exit
Exits the "Device Integration Manager".

6.5.2 View

6.5.2.1 Split device list window

The device list window is split or the split is removed.
When you select the menu command, the device list window is cut in half vertically. The right
half shows an additional device list window with the same structure. This window includes all
devices selected in the left device list window (check boxes are selected).

Note
The line selected with the mouse is displayed with a blue background in the active window. In
the inactive window, the line is displayed with a gray background.

The check boxes in the left device list window are visible but cannot be operated.
You can move the dividing line between the two device list windows with the mouse.
The buttons for adding or removing selected individual devices or sub-trees are located
between the two windows.
The selection of devices in the device list window is used for
• Integrating and
• Creating your own device library.
With a device list window that is not split, a selection can be made by setting the check boxes
in the line of the device.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

60 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Integrating devices into SIMATIC PDM
6.5 Menus and dialog boxes

Mouse operation
By selecting a line in the left device list window and clicking the button, you add individual
devices or sub-trees to the right device list window.
By selecting a line in the right device list window and clicking the button, you remove the
individual devices or sub-trees added previously from the right device list window.

Keyboard operation
Use the "SHIFT + >" and "SHIFT + <" shortcuts to add or remove the selected devices to and
from the right window.

Rules for working with split device list windows

When a filter is used, it acts on both device list windows.
Sorting can take place independently in each window.
Searches are only conducted in the active window with the selected line having a blue
background.
An export only includes the contents of the left window (with selection information).
Only one device list window is displayed after the Device Integration Manager is restarted.

Note
You cannot split the device list window when the list of integrated or used devices is displayed.

6.5.3 Catalog

6.5.3.1 Complete device information

Modifying the information in a device description file

The table below shows the information that can be completed in the "Device Integration
Manager" dialog box using the "Complete device information" function.

Column Explanation
Device name You can modify the device name in this input box.
Name of the device ver‐ You can modify the version of the device description in this input field.
sion
Manufacturer Manufacturer of the field device
Type ID Identifier for a device type in hexadecimal format
You can find information on this in IEC 61804-3.
Device revision Identifier for a device revision
Communication Communication type for the connection to the field device

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 61
Integrating devices into SIMATIC PDM
6.5 Menus and dialog boxes

Column Explanation
Classification Class of the device - name of the object (e.g., SENSOR - FLOW - ULTRA‐
SONIC)
DD revision Version of the device description file
You can find information on this in IEC 61804-3.
EDD Name of the device version
You can find information on this in IEC 61804-3.

6.5.3.2 Integrate
Use the menu command Catalog > Integrate to integrate the device description files of the
devices into the device catalog of SIMATIC PDM for those devices with selected check boxes
in the "Path" column of the device list.

Compiling device description files for SIMATIC PDM

You can find information about the possible settings in the description of the PDM setting in
the section ""Device Integration Manager" tab (Page 261)".

Remove integrated device description(s)

Section "List of integrated device descriptions (Page 58)"

6.5.3.3 User-specific device DVD

Creating user-specific device DVD

You can use the Catalog > Creating user-specific device DVD... menu command to create
your own device library. You can copy created device libraries, save them as compressed
archive or burn them on DVD and read in and integrate them with the Device Integration
Manager just like the SIMATIC PDM DVD "Device Library …".

Additional information
Information on creating a device library from a collection of device descriptions is available
here (Page 54).
Information on creating a device library using a project filter is available here (Page 53).

"Creating user-specific device DVD" dialog

Procedure
1. Select the Catalog > Creating user-specific device DVD... menu command.
The "Create own device library ..." dialog box opens.
2. Enter the destination path, the name and a version identification of the device library.
3. Click "OK".

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

62 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Integrating devices into SIMATIC PDM
6.5 Menus and dialog boxes

6.5.3.4 Filter file

Applying Filter File

You can use the Catalog > Applying Filter File... menu command to apply predefined filter files
(device lists in XML format saved in the Device Integration Manager beforehand) to the device
library.
The "Filter file" box is displayed underneath the "Source folder" box if a filter file is loaded.

"Apply Filter File..." dialog box

Procedure
1. Select the Catalog > Applying Filter File... menu command.
The "Applying Filter File..." dialog box opens.
2. Select a file with an exported device list.
3. Click "OK".
The currently displayed device list is filtered as follows:
• Only devices that are read in and are included in the filter file are displayed.
• Only devices that are selected in the filter file can be selected for integration.

Remove Filter File/Project Filter

The Catalog > Remove Filter File/Project Filter menu command is used to stop the application
of the filter file or a project filter. The complete device list is displayed once again when you
revoke the filter.

6.5.3.5 Project filter

Applying a project filter

You can use the Catalog > Apply Project Filter… menu command to select a STEP 7 project
or STEP 7 multiproject to filter the device list for the components used in the project.
The "Project filter" box is displayed underneath the "Source folder" box if a project is loaded.
By combining the "Create own device library" and "Apply Project Filter" functions, you can
create a device DVD that is perfectly adapted to your project.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 63
Integrating devices into SIMATIC PDM
6.5 Menus and dialog boxes

If you select a STEP 7 multiproject, all projects are always selected, even when only a
subproject is selected in the dialog box.

Note
Object status
Make sure that the status of each device contained in the project file is also integrated in the
device library before you apply the project filter. You can determine this by the status icon in
the "Icon" column of the device list. You can find a list of the icons under Device list (Page 45).

Additional information
Information on creating a device library using a project filter is available here (Page 53).

"Apply project filter..." dialog box

Requirement
A device list has been read in.

Applying a project filter

Procedure
1. Click the "Apply Project Filter..." icon in the menu bar.
The "Open Project" dialog box opens.
2. Select the required project in the "User project" tab.
If you want to open a multiproject, select the "Multiproject" tab.
3. If the required project file is located on an external source, click the "Browse" button and
navigate to the required path.
4. Confirm your entry by pressing "Enter".
The device list is searched and updated.
To revoke the filter, click the button.

Remove Filter File/Project Filter

The Catalog > Remove Filter File/Project Filter menu command is used to stop the application
of the filter file or a project filter. The complete device list is displayed once again when you
revoke the filter.

6.5.3.6 Messages
Opens the "Messages" dialog box.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

64 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Integrating devices into SIMATIC PDM
6.5 Menus and dialog boxes

Additional information
Section "Message log (Page 156)"

6.5.3.7 Find

Using the Find function

You can use the Catalog > Find menu command to find device description files.

"Find" dialog box

Procedure
1. Select the menu command Catalog > Find.
The "Find" dialog box opens.
2. Enter a string and define search options.
3. Click "Find".

Settings in the "Find" dialog box

● Entry field with drop-down list
You can enter any string. You can search for this string.
● Check boxes
– Match case
The writing style of the string entered for an object in the device list is observed.
– Match entire cell contents
The entire string must match for an object in the device list.
– Search up
If this option is enabled, the search begins at the selected point and continues until the
start of the device list.
If this option is disabled, the search begins at the selected point and continues until the
end of the device list.
● "Find" button
The system searches through the displayed device list.

6.5.4 ? (Help)

6.5.4.1 Help
This menu command displays the Help on SIMATIC PDM.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 65
Integrating devices into SIMATIC PDM
6.5 Menus and dialog boxes

You can navigate to different help topics from the Table of Contents. The "Index" and "Find"
functions enable you to display information on specific terms.

6.5.4.2 Info
This menu command displays information about the version and the copyright.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

66 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
Views 7
7.1 Introduction
PDM objects are displayed in the following views in SIMATIC Manager:
● Process Device Plant View
The process device plant view provides an overview of all configured devices in all
configured networks.
● Process Device Network View
The plant topology is reproduced in the process device network view. The depicted objects
are links to the objects in the plant view.
● PDM objects can be configured with HW Config. Open the SIMATIC PDM shortcut menu
to assign parameters.
● The network links to the PDM objects are also listed in NetPro.

Working with SIMATIC PDM

License keys are required to use SIMATIC PDM. You will find information about this in the
pdmbase-readme file.
Recommendation: Before you assign parameters to a field device with SIMATIC PDM, check
whether you can reach the required device.

Additional information
Section "Settings" for the SIMATIC project (Page 85)"

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 67
Views
7.2 Views in SIMATIC Manager

7.2 Views in SIMATIC Manager

7.2.1 Process devices plant view

7.2.1.1 Opening the process devices plant view

The process devices plant view provides an overview of all configured devices in all configured
networks.
This view is used to obtain a quick overview of the configured devices. You cannot configure
new networks in this view.

Opening the process device plant view

1. Select the View > Process device plant view menu command in SIMATIC Manager.
The process device plant view opens. The table shows all devices which are subordinate
to the current project.
If a project is part of a multiproject, the plant view of the multiproject opens.

7.2.1.2 Messages
Opens the "Messages" dialog box.

Additional information
Section "Message log (Page 156)"

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

68 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Views
7.2 Views in SIMATIC Manager

7.2.1.3 Adapting the process device plant view

Display devices only

1. To hide all signal modules, interface modules and link modules, select View > Display
devices only in the process device plant view.
Only the AFDiSD modules are displayed.
The display is reset when the process device plant view is called again.

Display devices with same name

1. To only display devices with names that appear multiple times, select View > Display
devices with same name in the process device plant view.
Devices with names that only appear once are hidden.
The display is reset when the process device plant view is called again.

7.2.2 Process devices network view

The process devices network view displays the devices in groups according to the network
topology.
You can configure smaller projects directly in the process devices network view, for example,
for end-to-end connections between a PC and a device in the factory.

Opening the process device network view

1. Select the View > Process device network view menu command in SIMATIC Manager.
The process device network view opens.

See also
"Settings" for the SIMATIC project (Page 85)

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 69
Views
7.2 Views in SIMATIC Manager

7.2.3 Project synchronization

HW Config
In the course of device configuration in HW Config, an image of the plant structure, including
all devices which can be configured using SIMATIC PDM, is transferred from HW Config to
the process devices network view.
After saving in HW Config, the changes made to the devices are applied in the following views:
● Process devices network view
● Process devices plant view
Changes cannot be incorporated into the process devices view if the higher-level objects are
linked with HW Config to an existing S7 station.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

70 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Views
7.3 Views in SIMATIC PDM

7.3 Views in SIMATIC PDM

7.3.1 Main Window "SIMATIC PDM"

Introduction
The "SIMATIC PDM" main window remains on the screen throughout the work session and is
partially or totally covered by other activated dialog windows.

The main window is structured as follows:

Title bar (Page 72): The title bar shows the project name or the name of the object which was selected
before SIMATIC PDM was opened.
Menu bar (Page 72): The menu bar can be used to call SIMATIC PDM functions and manufacturer-
specific device functions.
Toolbar (Page 73): The toolbar provides quick access to a few menu commands.
Structure view (Page 73): The objects dis‐ Parameter table (Page 74): The parameters for the ob‐
played depend on the object which was se‐ ject selected in the structure view are displayed in a ta‐
lected before SIMATIC PDM was started. ble.
Status bar (Page 78): Contains information on the current processes.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 71
Views
7.3 Views in SIMATIC PDM

7.3.2 Title bar

The title bar shows the name of the object which was selected before SIMATIC PDM was
called.

7.3.3 Menu bar

Structure
Below is an overview of the SIMATIC PDM menus.

Menu Submenu in parameter assignment mode

File ● Save (Page 175)
● Exporting (Page 230)
● Importing (Page 231)
● Print (Page 183)
● Exit (Page 183)
Device ● Download to device (Page 186)
● Upload to PG/PC (Page 188)
● Assign address and TAG (Page 191)
● Value comparison (Page 193)
● Object properties (Page 195)
● Calibration log (Page 199)
● Change log (Page 207)
View ● Process variables (Page 215)
● Start LifeList (Page 145)
● Trends (Page 216) (depends on device)
Diagnostics ● Update diagnostics (Page 219)
Help ● Contents (Page 222)
● Help for device parameters (Page 222)
● Info (Page 222)
● Find (Page 222)
● Document Manager (Page 222)
● Device manual (depends on device)

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

72 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Views
7.3 Views in SIMATIC PDM

7.3.4 Toolbar
The toolbar is located below the menu bar and contains a number of icons with which you can
quickly perform frequently used menu commands without having to open a menu and select
the command.

SIMATIC PDM mode Icons

Parameter assignment mode

Icons
The icons are linked to the following commands:

Parameter assignment mode Menu command

Save (Page 175)

Print (Page 183)

Download to device (Page 231)

Upload to PG/PC (Page 232)

Value comparison (Page 193)

Change log (Page 207)

Device not checked (gray)/Device checked (Page 211) (green)

Process variables / Measured value display (depends on device)

(Page 215)
Update diagnostics (Page 219)

Start LifeList (Page 145)

Find (Page 222)

Contents (Page 222)

7.3.5 Structure view

The left-hand section of the main window in the structure view contains a tree structure. The
objects displayed depend on the object which was selected before SIMATIC PDM was started.
● If a single field device was selected, it will be displayed in the structure view. You can find
information on this in the section "Stand-alone device view (Page 79)".
● If a network or gateway (e.g., DP/PA-Link) was selected, the tree structure is displayed with
the associated devices in the structure view. You can find information on this in the section
"Multiple devices view (Page 80)".

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 73
Views
7.3 Views in SIMATIC PDM

Icons
You can see the following status icons in front of the objects in the tree view:

Icon Meaning
The device has been loaded.

At least one parameter of the object has been changed.

At least one parameter of the object is defective.

Display
The following are displayed in the structure view:
● Objects with associated parameter groups
● Any available lower-level objects
The selected parameter group is displayed on a blue background. The parameter table shows
the parameters of the selected parameter group.
Objects that contain lower-level objects can be identified by the check boxes next to the object
icon:
● Check box "+"
● Check box "-"
Note
Generally speaking, the table is only opened down to the structure view.
Move the parameter table in order to view all the general information for a device.

7.3.6 Parameter table

The right pane of the main window is filled by the parameter table.
The parameter table shows a device's parameters in the order in which they are listed in the
structure view. Unlike in the structure tree, no hierarchy is displayed here.

Device parameters
The parameters which can be edited depend on the device in question. Fields with a gray
background cannot be edited.
Refer to the manufacturer device description for information on how to set the device
parameters.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

74 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Views
7.3 Views in SIMATIC PDM

Display of the parameter table

The following columns are displayed in the parameter table:
● Parameter (Page 75)
● Value (Page 75)
● Unit (Page 76)
● Status (Page 76)
Each parameter group starts with a header with the name of the group on a gray background.
The indented header text indicates the classification level of the header. The parameter lines
are positioned underneath the header.

Operator input
Any entries and changes made must be loaded to the devices in order for them to take effect.
If you click an object in the structure view, the associated parameters are displayed in the
parameter table.

Additional information
● Section "Display in the views (Page 79)"

7.3.6.1 "Parameter" column of the parameter table

The names of the individual parameters are listed in the "Parameter" column.

7.3.6.2 "Value" column of the parameter table

This column displays the value of the parameter whose name is in the "Name" (Page 75)
column. This can be a numerical value, a physical unit, a status, or a designation.
The "Value" box can only be edited if it has a white background. A box with a gray background
indicates that the parameter is read-only and cannot be modified or written.
● Right-click on the value to display a list of possible value settings for selection, provided
that these value settings are specified in the device description.
● Enter a new value here or select a new setting from the drop-down list box.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 75
Views
7.3 Views in SIMATIC PDM

Shortcut menu
Right-click inside the parameter table to open one of the following fields:
● An information box is shown for static fields if the cursor is located over a parameter in the
"Parameter" column.
Information is displayed to explain the meaning of the field or to explain the associated
entry in the "Value" column.
● Selection of values from drop-down lists
The drop-down lists open when you select a corresponding value with the cursor and click
on it.
Select the correct setting for your plant- and device-specific conditions.
● Shortcut menu for input boxes

Menu command Explanations/operating instructions

Minimum value ... Displays the minimum permitted value of the parameter. *) **)
Maximum value ... Displays the maximum permitted value of the parameter. *) **)
Default value ... Displays the default value of the parameter. *) **)
Distributing parame‐ Starts the quantity operation (distributing parameters)
ters
*
) Click the value to transfer it to the parameter table.
**
) There can be several minimum, maximum and default values.

Additional information
● Section "Distributing parameters (Page 77)"

7.3.6.3 "Unit" column of the parameter table

The "Unit" column displays the engineering unit of the numerical value present in the "Value"
(Page 75) column.

7.3.6.4 "Status" column of the parameter table

The "Status" column displays the status of the parameter whose name is in the "Name"
(Page 75) column.
The table below shows the icons that can be displayed here:

Icon Meaning Action that can trigger the sta‐

tus
- empty - Value (Page 75) corresponds to the offline data storage Save
system.
Initialization running or status "OK". Open new PDM object
Value was never changed.
The parameter has been changed by means of operator ● Edit
input, import, or internal methods. ● Dialogs
Value was changed by user.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

76 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Views
7.3 Views in SIMATIC PDM

Icon Meaning Action that can trigger the sta‐

tus
The parameter could not be converted. Edit
Value could not be converted following a change in the
unit.
A parameter's value is defective. Validity check of value
An illegal value was detected the validity check (e.g., val‐
ue too high or too low)
The parameter has been successfully loaded. ● Download to device
There is no difference between the loaded and the con‐ ● Upload to PG/PC
figured parameter.
The parameter cannot be loaded, as a communication ● Download to device
error is present. ● Upload to PG/PC
● Error message when downloading to the device
● Error message when uploading to PG/PC

7.3.6.5 Distributing parameters

Requirement
The parameter view is open.

Distributing parameters
To distribute parameters, follow these steps:
1. Click a parameter in the parameter table.
2. Right-click to open the shortcut menu.
3. Select "Distribute parameters".
The "Distribute parameters" dialog opens. All relevant devices are displayed in a list.
4. Select one or more devices in the list.
To select individual devices, select the check box in front of the device.
To select all devices, select the top check box in the header of the list.
5. Click on "Start".
To cancel the action, click on "Cancel".
To stop the action, click on "Close".
The parameter is transferred for the selected devices.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 77
Views
7.3 Views in SIMATIC PDM

Message log
When the parameters have been distributed, a dialog box and a message log appear. The
following messages and statuses are shown in a table:

Symbol Class Status text Message

Error Action finished. Mes‐ <Action identifier>: Action failed. Object is locked.
sages and errors oc‐
curred.
Error Action finished. Mes‐ <Action identifier>: Action failed. <Error text according to error code>
sages and errors oc‐
curred.
Error Action finished. Mes‐ <Action identifier>: Action failed. <Error text according to error code>
sages and errors oc‐
curred.
Error Action finished. Mes‐ <Action identifier>: Variable 'X' could not be set because it is outside the valid
sages and errors oc‐ range.
curred.
Informa‐ Action finished. Mes‐ <Action identifier>: Variable 'X' could not be set because it has different con‐
tion sages occurred. figurations.
Informa‐ Action finished. Mes‐ <Action identifier>: Variable 'X' could not be set because it has different con‐
tion sages occurred. figurations.
Warning Action finished. Mes‐ <Action identifier>: Variable 'X' could not be set to 'Y'. The value was auto‐
sages and warnings matically changed to 'Z'.
occurred.
Informa‐ Action finished. Mes‐ <Action identifier>: Variable 'X' was set to 'Y'.
tion sages occurred.

7.3.7 Status bar

The status bar is located at the bottom of the main window

Display
The following information is provided in the status bar:
1. User that is currently using SIMATIC PDM
2. PDM object on which information is currently shown in the parameter list ( the object is
locked for editing in the current view or another user is currently making changes to the
object)

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

78 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Views
7.3 Views in SIMATIC PDM

3. Diagnostics activated / deactivated

4. Identity check activated / deactivated
5. Processing status
6. Connection status for the object currently selected in the tree structure

7.3.8 Display

7.3.8.1 Display in the views

Operating principle
You can open SIMATIC PDM for a device from SIMATIC Manager or HW Config.
After you open SIMATIC PDM, the table displays the values saved in the project. These values
are projected values and default values of the object, which was selected before SIMATIC
PDM was started.
All objects for which parameters can be assigned are displayed in the structure view, including
the lower-level objects. Only the parameter table of the root object is initially displayed and
can be edited (fields on white background).
● Select an object in the structure view; its parameters are then shown in the parameter table,
where they can be edited.
● If an object has already been opened by a different user, a message is displayed that
identifies the user who opened the object and the PC from which the object was opened.
All fields of the parameter table then have a gray background and cannot be modified.
Note
Changes made to an object opened in SIMATIC PDM only take effect when you select the
menu command File > Save.

The displays in the status bar and title bar depend on the object you have currently selected.

Setting options for SIMATIC PDM

You can find information on this in the section "Settings for SIMATIC PDM (Page 258)".

7.3.8.2 Stand-alone device view

SIMATIC PDM is opened in the stand-alone device view if a device was selected before
SIMATIC PDM was started. The device represents the base of the tree in the structure view.

The main window is structured as follows:

Title bar
Menu bar
Toolbar

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 79
Views
7.3 Views in SIMATIC PDM

The main window is structured as follows:

Parameter table (on the right in the main win‐
dow)

Status bar

Additional information
● Section "Main Window "SIMATIC PDM" (Page 71)"

7.3.8.3 Multiple devices view

SIMATIC PDM is opened in the multiple device view if an object with lower-level objects was
selected before SIMATIC PDM was started, e.g. an ET 200 station with connected field
devices. The object represents the base of the tree in the structure view.

The main window is structured as follows:

Title bar
Menu bar
Toolbar
Parameter table (on the right in the main win‐
dow)

Status bar

Display
When the multiple device view is opened, only the parameter table of the root object is
displayed at first. You can edit all the displayed objects and their lower-level objects without
opening SIMATIC PDM again.

Additional information
● Section "Main Window "SIMATIC PDM" (Page 71)"

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

80 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Views
7.3 Views in SIMATIC PDM

7.3.9 Keyboard operation

Key shortcuts
The tables below list the key shortcuts.

Selecting menus via keys

Key shortcut Function

<CTRL + S> Save (File menu) (Page 175)
<CTRL + P> Print... (File menu) (Page 183)
<Alt + X> For the menu which contains the underscored letter X
Underscored letter in Assigned menu command
the menu command

Key operation in dialog boxes

Key shortcut Function

<Tab> To the next input field, from left to right and from top to bottom
Arrow keys Selected in the drop-down list
Spacebar Selects an object or cancels a selection

Key operation in help programs

Key shortcut Function

<Alt + F4> Closes the help window, return to the tool window

Selecting menu commands using shortcut keys

You can execute many menu commands by pressing the associated ALT key shortcut. Press
the following keys in succession:
1. <Alt> key
2. The underscored letter of the required menu (e.g. <Alt>, <D> for the File menu - if the menu
bar contains a File command). The menu opens.
3. Letter that is underlined in the desired menu command.
The submenus of the corresponding menu commands will be opened in the next steps.
Repeat these actions until you have selected the entire menu command by typing in the
relevant letters.
You trigger the menu command as soon as you have entered the last letter of the shortcut
keys.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 81
Views
7.3 Views in SIMATIC PDM

Example

Menu Key shortcut

File <Alt> + <D>
Help <Alt> + <H>

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

82 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
Functions 8
8.1 Introduction
Before you can work with SIMATIC PDM, you must create a project containing at least one
PDM object in the SIMATIC Manager. Below the term "PDM object" refers to those objects
that can be configured, have parameters assigned, or diagnosed with SIMATIC PDM. PDM
objects are:
● Field devices
● Remote I/O stations (with/without modules or field devices)
● Networks containing field devices

Information about the creation process

● For information on creating a project, refer to the PCS 7/STEP 7 help.
● For information on creating PDM objects, please refer to the section "Inserting devices
(Page 92)".

Requirements for working with SIMATIC PDM

● SIMATIC PDM is installed.
● The necessary license keys are available.
● The device descriptions have been integrated.
● There must be a connection to the corresponding network for online functions. You can
find information about this in the section "Establishing connections to field devices
(Page 21)".

Note
Access to the hardware configuration
Only one user at a time may access HW Config within a project. It does not matter whether
one and the same or several S7 stations are being configured (see also the readme notes
regarding use in PCS 7).

Calling SIMATIC PDM

Where Requirement Function

SIMATIC Manager Project containing PDM object Edit > Open object
● Process device network view has been created.
Select object
● Process device plant view
HW Config Device is created. Double-click device

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 83
Functions
8.1 Introduction

Scope of functions
● Configuration and parameter assignment
– Integrating field devices into plants and networks
– Making project engineering settings for and configuring connections
– Making project engineering settings for and configuring devices
● Mini control and monitoring system for field devices
– Controlling and monitoring field devices
● Diagnostics
– Performing diagnostics on field device functions
– Performing diagnostics on networks
– Evaluating logs

Hardware configurations
Integration into a SIMATIC project enables you to create SIMATIC stations and field devices
in HW Config. You can open SIMATIC PDM directly on the networks and subordinate field
devices listed below:
● PROFIBUS DP
● PROFIBUS PA
● PROFINET IO
● Ethernet
● HART modem
● FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Assigning parameters and loading

In the case of offline parameter assignment, data relating to entries and changes made in
SIMATIC PDM is saved in the project data.
The inputs and changes will only become active after uploading the project data to the device.
The option for online parameter assignment depends on the device and must be stored in the
device description.
Entries and changes made in SIMATIC PDM must be loaded into the project.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

84 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Functions
8.2 Project editing

8.2 Project editing

8.2.1 "Settings" for the SIMATIC project

You will find the following views in SIMATIC Manager after the installation of SIMATIC PDM:
● Process device plant view
● Process device network view

Project settings
The project settings are made in the SIMATIC Manager. These settings apply to the SIMATIC
project and SIMATIC PDM.
● Language for the menus and dialog boxes
● Default project view
● Display
● Details in the columns
Make the project settings In SIMATIC Manager using the following menu command: Options
> Settings...

Settings Tab Meaning

Language selection "Language" tab Language displayed in the menus and dialog boxes in the SIMATIC
Manager and SIMATIC PDM
Default project view "View" tab Start view for the SIMATIC Manager: Available views of SIMATIC
PDM:
● Process device plant view
● Process device network view
Details in the columns "Columns" tab Views and object types in the parameter table

"Columns" tab
On the "Columns" tab, you can select the columns that you want to be displayed in a PDM
view.
Select an object type in the tree structure. Then go to the "Visible Columns" list and activate
the check boxes for the entries you want to be displayed for the selected object type.
Object types
● Type 1 in the tree structure
– Process device plant view
– Process device network view
● Type 2 in the tree structure
– Process device plant view > Devices

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 85
Functions
8.2 Project editing

● Type 3
– Process device network view > Networks
● Type 4
– Process device network view > Networks > PC
● Type 5
– Process device network view > Networks > Communication network
– Process device network view > Networks > Communication network > Object(on all
subordinate levels)

Visible columns
Object type Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4 Type 5
Object name Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard
Picture Name For OS Standard - - - -
LID - Standard - - -
(Location identifier denotes the
installation position of a device)
Address - x - Standard Standard
Description Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard
Message Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard
Device status - Standard - - Standard
Last communication - Standard - - Standard
Text1 x x x x x
Text2 x x x x x
Text3 x x x x x
Device - Standard x x Standard
PLT ID* - Standard - - x
Manufacturer - Standard - - Standard
Serial number - x - - x
Installation date - x - - x
Hardware version - x - - x
Software version - x - - x
Article number - x - - x
Object status - Standard - - Standard
DD revision - x - - x
Author x x x x x
Revision date Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard
Comment x x x x x

*Process control ID generated internally by PDM for identification of an object for connections
to the Asset Management System (PCS 7 Maintenance Station and PDM Maintenance
Station).

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

86 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Functions
8.2 Project editing

● Type 6
– Settings for a multiproject

Process device plant view (multiproject) Process device network view (multiproject)
Object name Standard Standard
Project language Standard Standard
UNC path Standard Standard
Path to "Computer" Standard Standard
Computer Standard Standard
Computer after removal Standard Standard
Path after removal Standard Standard

See also
Settings for SIMATIC PDM (Page 258)
Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC Manager (Page 225)

8.2.2 Setting the interface on the computer

Use the interface settings of the project (SIMATIC PCS 7 or SIMATIC STEP 7).
The following interface types are used in SIMATIC PCS 7 and SIMATIC STEP 7:
● PROFIBUS DP interface
● Ethernet interface
● COM interface

Alternative communication channels in the case of redundant S7-400 stations

If SIMATIC PDM signals a connection failure due to a fault in the communication channel, an
attempt is made to automatically establish a connection using the redundant S7-400 station
via an alternative communication channel.

8.2.3 Plant-wide communication by means of routing

Overview
In most automation systems, the programming device can only be operated via the bus cable
(subnet) connected directly to the automation system. On larger networked plants you must
connect the programming device to different bus cables (subnets) before you can go online to
a remote automation system.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 87
Functions
8.2 Project editing

Routing function
The routing function allows you to reach automation systems online across subnet boundaries
from a central point (Engineering Station) with the programming device or PC, in order, for
example, to download user programs or a hardware configuration or to perform test functions.

Requirements
The following conditions must be met for S7 routing:
● STEP 7 as of version 5.5 and SIMATIC PDM, i.e., SIMATIC PDM, are integrated.
● The communication-capable modules (CPUs or CPs) which establish gateways between
subnets must support "S7 routing".
● All the automation devices or communications partners that can be reached in a plant
network are configured and downloaded within an S7 project.
● The SIMATIC S7 station required is networked and can be reached via the network nodes.
● The last communication interface (CPU, CP) supports the "Dataset gateway" function.
● The modules are downloaded together with the configuration information, which contains
the current "knowledge" on the complete network configuration of the project.
Reason: All the modules involved in the gateway must receive information on which subnets
can be reached over which routes (routing tables).
● The programming device or PC to which you want to establish an online connection via a
gateway is configured in the network configuration and assigned to your programming
device.

Additional information
SIMATIC documentation; SIMATIC PDM; pdm-readme

8.2.4 Checking the device integration

You can check in a project whether the required device descriptions are integrated for all
objects to be displayed in SIMATIC PDM.
These situations serve as examples for this:
● A project has been copied to the PDM computer.
● Device descriptions have been deleted on the computer.
● A computer has been reinstalled and the device descriptions were not integrated.

Requirement
SIMATIC PDM is installed.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

88 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Functions
8.2 Project editing

Procedure
1. Open the process devices plant view in SIMATIC Manager.
2. Open the "Devices" folder in the tree.
3. Check whether devices are there that are labeled as follows:

Icon Meaning Note

Deactivated No device description is integrated in SIMATIC PDM for the
device.

4. If deactivated devices have been found, select the View > Details menu command.
5. Check the information in the "Object name" column.

Information in the "Ob‐ Meaning Further procedure

ject name" column
"TAG" or "Default" A device description from the Assign the required device description
device catalog has not yet to the device.
been assigned to the device. Section "Device selection (Reassign)
(Page 233)"
Plant-specific object The device description that Integrate the required device descrip‐
name has been assigned to the de‐ tion.
vice cannot be found or is no Section "Integrating device descriptions
longer functional (e.g. acci‐ (Page 51)"
dentally deleted).

Additional information
● Section "Overview of Device Icons (Page 140)"
● Section "Replacing devices (Page 121)"
● Section "Completing a device description (Page 52)"
● Section "Cleaning the project (reorganization) (Page 90)"

8.2.5 Print
You can print out the parameter list for a device.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 89
Functions
8.2 Project editing

Setting the printer options

Note
Note the following:
● The printer options depend on your computer's operating system and on the printer being
used.
● The file is sent to the default printer.
● If the printout has more than one page, two periods are printed after the page number in
the bottom right corner of the page. The last page does not have these periods, indicating
no more pages are to follow.

Requirements
● SIMATIC PDM is open.
● In the structure view, an object is selected in the root folder of a device.
You can find information on the structure view in the section "Stand-alone device view
(Page 79)".

Procedure
1. Select the menu command File > Print or click the "Print" button .
The "Print" dialog box opens.
2. Select the required options.
3. Click "OK".

8.2.6 Cleaning the project (reorganization)

PDM objects can be contained in copied SIMATIC projects. If SIMATIC PDM will no longer be
used in the project, you can remove the requirement for TAG licenses in the project using the
"Reorganize" function.

Note
SIMATIC PDM must be closed before you use the "Reorganize" function.
The time it takes to perform reorganization depends on the data movement required, and it
can be a long time. The function is therefore not carried out automatically (for example, when
closing a project).

Procedure
In SIMATIC Manager, select the menu command File > Reorganize.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

90 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Functions
8.2 Project editing

8.2.7 Saving the configuration

Changes that are made with SIMATIC PDM are always stored in the SIMATIC project.
Save the SIMATIC project to save the changes. Stop SIMATIC PDM before you save an entire
SIMATIC project.

Procedure
Select the menu command File > Save As in the SIMATIC Manager.

Additional information
● STEP 7 Online Help
● PCS 7 Online Help

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 91
Functions
8.3 Device management

8.3 Device management

8.3.1 Inserting devices

8.3.1.1 Inserting objects

You can use the "Insert New Object" function to perform the following:
● Create networks, including network components
● Insert objects into a configured network:
– Insert an individual device or module
– Insert multiple devices or modules at the same time
Note
This function is only available for the following devices:
● PROFIBUS devices
● PROFINET devices
● HART modem devices
● HART devices downstream of a remote I/O

Configure FOUNDATION Fieldbus devices in HW Config.

Requirements
● The project is open in the process device network view.
● The PDM folder called "Networks" is available in the tree structure.
If the folder structure has not yet been created, select the menu command Insert New Object
followed by Networks.
Note
Licenses for SIMATIC PDM are required for further processing.
Without license keys, you can configure a maximum of 4 devices (demo mode).

Inserting a network, a header module, modules, and a field device

Follow the steps below to insert objects into higher-level objects one after the other. You will
find more information on object types that can be inserted in an object in the section ""Insert
Object - Assign Device Type" dialog box (Page 94) ".

Procedure
1. Select the higher-level object in the tree structure in the window on the left.
2. In the shortcut menu, select the menu command Insert New Object > Object.
The "Insert Object - <...>" dialog box opens.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

92 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Functions
8.3 Device management

3. Make the relevant settings for the inserted object. You can find information on this in the
section ""Insert object - ..." dialog box (Page 93)"
– "Object name" input box
– "<Address>" input box (e.g., PROFIBUS address or PROFINET IP address)
– "Number" input box
4. Click the "Assign Device Type" button.
The "Insert Object - Assign Device Type" dialog box opens.
You can find additional information on this in the section ""Insert Object - Assign Device
Type" dialog box (Page 94)".
5. Select the object to be added from the tree structure.
6. Click "OK".
The objects are inserted.
7. Correct the assigned addresses if necessary.
You can find additional information on this in the section "Setting the bus address in HW
Config (Page 99)".

Additional information
Section "Device selection (Reassign) (Page 233)".

8.3.1.2 "Insert object - ..." dialog box

Make the settings for inserted objects in the "Insert Object - <...>" dialog box.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 93
Functions
8.3 Device management

Setting parameters
You must set the following parameters in order to insert objects:
● Object name
Specify the name of the inserted object.
The entered name is the base name when creating several objects.
● <Address> (e.g., PROFIBUS address or PROFINET IP address)
Note
This setting cannot be changed when HART devices are added.

– Enter the address for the inserted object.

– If you wish to create multiple objects, enter the first address of the objects to be inserted.
● Number
Note
This setting cannot be changed when HART devices are added.
Adjust the number of objects to be added when adding several objects. Please note that
the value depends on the network being used and other factors.
A certain number (n) of objects of one type is created in accordance with these parameters.
The object name is generated as follows:
– If the number is equal to 1, the address does not appear in the object name that is
generated (<name>).
<name><address>
– If the number is greater than 1:

PROFIBUS devices and modules Channels of remote I/O

<address><name> <name><address>
... ...
<address +(n*-1)><name> <name><address +(n*-1)>
*: n corresponds to the number of objects to be inserted

"Assign Device Type" button

The "Insert Object - Assign Device Type" dialog box opens.
Assign a specific object type to the object you want to insert in the project. The possible object
types are listed in the tree structure. The object types displayed depend on the location at
which an object was inserted.

8.3.1.3 "Insert Object - Assign Device Type" dialog box

Select the device description file of the desired device in this dialog box.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

94 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Functions
8.3 Device management

The devices are structured by the device types in a tree structure.

Note
Integrated devices
You can only select devices for which a device description file has been integrated via the
Device Integration Manager.

Object types
When assigning objects, select the object type. The following object types can be assigned,
depending on the nature of the higher-level object:

Higher-level object Object to be inserted

PDM "Networks" folder Communications network
● As part of the assignment process, select the
communications network via which the PDM objects
are to be connected.
● Selection: Header module
– PROFIBUS DP network ● Selection:
– PROFIBUS link – Remote I/O
– PROFINET network – PROFIBUS Link
– MODBUS – PROFIBUS DP device
– Ethernet – PROFIBUS PA device
– HART modem network – HART device
– HART server
– FOUNDATION Fieldbus network
Remote I/O Modules
● Selection:
– Module
Modules Field device
● Selection: ● HART device
– Module

"Device identification" Button

When you click this button, a connection to the device is established and an attempt is made
to read the information from the device. If not all the required information could be read out,
the tree structure includes a preselection with paths designed for the device. Select one of
these paths.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 95
Functions
8.3 Device management

Device identification procedure:

● For PA devices:
Select the "PROFIBUS PA" folder and then press the "Device identification" button
● For DP devices:
Select the "PROFIBUS DP" folder and then press the "Device identification" button
If device identification is not unique, select the required device in the result list and click
the "Device identification" button again.
● For HART devices:
Select the "HART" folder and then press the "Device identification" button

Additional information
● Section "Integrating devices into SIMATIC PDM (Page 41)"

8.3.1.4 Integrating a device in HW Config

Below, you will learn how to insert devices in the project using HW Config:
● Inserting a DP device
● Inserting a DP remote I/O system (distributed I/O)
● Inserting a PA device at a DP/PA coupler
● Inserting a PA device at a DP/PA-Link
● Inserting a PA remote I/O system (distributed I/O)
● Inserting a remote I/O system (PROFINET)

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

96 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Functions
8.3 Device management

Requirement
PROFIBUS DP master system or PROFINET IO system
Options for creating the PROFIBUS DP master system:
● In HW Config:
If the DP master system is not displayed, select the menu command Insert > Master
system at the required PROFIBUS module.
● In the process device network view:
– Open the process device network view in SIMATIC Manager.
– Double-click the "Networks" object in the right window to insert a PROFIBUS DP
network. Select "Networks" in the left window, and select the menu command Insert
New Object > Object in the shortcut menu.
– Click the "Assign Device Type" button.
The "Insert object - Assign device type" dialog box opens.
You can find additional information on this in the section ""Insert Object - Assign Device
Type" dialog box (Page 94)".
– Select the PROFIBUS DP network from the tree structure.
– Click "OK".
The PROFIBUS DP network is inserted.
Note
Representation in HW Config
Objects created in the process device network view are not displayed in HW Config.

Inserting a DP device
PROFIBUS devices can be inserted directly into the PROFIBUS DP master system.
1. Select the device you require under "PROFIBUS DP" in the hardware catalog and drag it
onto the DP master system.

Inserting a DP remote I/O system (distributed I/O)

Integration is described based on the example of ET 200iSP .
1. Place the head-end station "IM152-1" you have selected from the hardware catalog under
"PROFIBUS DP > ET200iSP" at the DP master system.
The slots of the head-end station are displayed in the detail view in the table below the
graphic.
2. You can insert the required analog and digital modules in slot 4 and higher.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 97
Functions
8.3 Device management

Inserting a PA device at a DP/PA coupler

1. Select a device in the PROFIBUS-PA folder of the hardware catalog.
This can be, for example, a SITRANS P pressure transmitter listed under "PROFIBUS-PA
> Siemens > Sensors > Pressure > SITRANS P" or a device profile listed under "PROFIBUS-
PA > Other".
2. Position it at the PROFIBUS DP master system.
You have to select the device for some objects. You can find information on this in the
section ""Insert Object - Assign Device Type" dialog box (Page 94)".
Note
The DP/PA coupler does not need to be configured; you only need to set an appropriate
bus transmission rate (for example, 45.45 kbps for the Siemens coupler) for the DP master
system.

Inserting a PA device at a DP/PA-Link

1. Place the "IM 153-2" you have selected from the hardware catalog under "PROFIBUS DP
> DP/PA-Link" at the DP master system. (The IM 153-2 replaces the IM 157, but both types
can be used as PROFIBUS-Link ).
HW Config creates a PA master system for the DP/PA-Link .
2. Drag-and-drop the PA devices to this PA master system.
For certain objects it is necessary to select the device. You can find information on this in
the section ""Insert Object - Assign Device Type" dialog box (Page 94)".

Inserting a PA remote I/O system (distributed I/O)

Integration is described based on the Pepperl+Fuchs example.
1. You can find the "RSD-GW-EX1.PA" head-end station in the hardware catalog under
"PROFIBUS-PA\REMOTE I/O\PEPPERL+FUCHS GmbH\ P+F I/O System".
Place the head-end station on the DP master system (with DP/PA coupler, see above) or
on the PA master system (with DP/PA-Link, see above).
The slots of the head-end station are displayed in the detail view in the table below the
graphic.
2. Place one of the modules listed in the hardware catalog under "PROFIBUS-PA > P+F I/
O SYSTEM > RSD-GW-EX1.PA" in a free slot.

Inserting a remote I/O system (PROFINET)

The integration is described using ET 200M as an example.
1. Place the head-end station "IM153-4" you have selected from the hardware catalog under
"PROFINET IO > I/O > ET200M" at the IO system.
2. The slots of the head-end station are displayed in the detail view in the table below the
graphic. You can insert the required analog and digital modules in slot 4 and higher.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

98 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Functions
8.3 Device management

8.3.1.5 Setting the bus address in HW Config

Make sure the bus addresses of all field devices are entered correctly in HW Config.
Bus addresses can only be set for field devices on a PROFIBUS network.

Procedure
Proceed as follows to edit the settings:
1. Select a field device in HW Config. In the shortcut menu, select the menu command Object
Properties.
The "Properties - ..." dialog box opens.
2. Click the button for the associated bus system in the "Node/ ...system" area.
The "Properties - ...Interface <field device>" dialog box opens.
3. Enter the desired bus address.
HW Config automatically assigns addresses in the order in which objects are created. You
may need to correct these addresses, depending on the device used (refer to the device
manual).
Click the "OK" button to save the address.
4. Click "OK" to close the "Properties - ..." dialog boxes.
5. Save the project with the menu command Station > Save.

8.3.1.6 Integrating a HART device in a HART modem network

+$570RGHP1HW]

Figure 8-1 HART modem

The following describes how to integrate a HART device in a HART modem network.

Requirements
● A project has been created.
● The device description files (EDD) for planned or already installed field devices are available
in SIMATIC PDM.
● An access point of the computer is set to the COM port to which the HART modem network
is connected.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 99
Functions
8.3 Device management

Integrating a HART device in a HART modem network

1. Open the project in the process device network view.
2. Right-click the "Networks" object in the tree structure. In the shortcut menu that opens,
select the menu command Insert New Object > Communication network.
The "Insert Object(s) - <...>" dialog box opens.
3. Click the "Assign Device Type" button.
The "Insert Object(s) - Assign Device Type" dialog box opens. You can find additional
information in the section "Insert Object - Assign Device Type" dialog box (Page 94).
4. To set the network properties, select the inserted HART modem network in the right window
and right-click. Select the entry Object Properties in the displayed shortcut menu.
5. Enter the device-specific information in the "Communication" tab of the Properties dialog
for the HART modem network.
Set the master type (primary or secondary, usually secondary):
Here, you can select the "Prefer 'Long address'" check box.
6. To check if the correct network and the correct port are assigned to the COM interface,
double-click the "PC" object in the right window. Select the "COM interface" object in HW
Config, and select the Object Properties menu command in the shortcut menu.
Note
The COM port is almost always "1" for notebooks. Since most PCs have two COM ports,
you must specify the port to which the HART modem is connected in this tab. Check whether
the settings for the FIFO buffer of the COM port are suitable, or immediately use a USB
HART modem.

7. To insert the HART device, select the "HART modem network" object in the right window
and right-click. In the displayed shortcut menu, select the Insert New Object > Object
command.
In the displayed dialog box, enter the name of the HART device.
8. To set the device address, select the inserted HART device in the right window and right-
click. Select the entry Object Properties in the displayed shortcut menu.
9. Enter the device-specific information (long address) in the "Communication" tab of the
Properties dialog for the HART device.
Note
Address with HART
The information must correspond to the connected device.
● The short address must be entered for HART devices. This address must correspond
to the connected HART device. The short address is always "0", unless the device is in
the multi-drop function.
● For a HART interface, enter the long address. This address contains the following
device-specific information:
– Manufacturer
– Device type
– Device name

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

100 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Functions
8.3 Device management

10.To change the device address, select the inserted HART device in the right window and
then select the Object properties menu command in the shortcut menu. Select the
"Communication" tab in the displayed dialog and enter the new short address.
Note
The address must correspond to the connected device. The short address for HART
devices is always "0" unless the device is in the multi-drop function.

11.Start SIMATIC PDM by double-clicking the newly inserted HART device in the right window.
Select the relevant device in the tree view (only required the first time the device is called),
and assign parameters for the device.
Note
Multiple PCs in one project
If there are several PCs in your project, you have to define one of them as the current one.
To do this, select the desired "PC" object in the left window and then select the menu
command Options > Define Current PC.

8.3.1.7 Integrating a MODBUS device in a MODBUS network

0RGEXV

The following paragraph describes how you integrate a MODBUS device in a MODBUS
network.

Requirements
● A project has been created.
● The device description files (EDD) for planned or already installed field devices are available
in SIMATIC PDM.

Integrating a MODBUS device in a MODBUS network

1. Open the project in the process device network view.
2. Right-click the "Networks" object in the tree structure. In the shortcut menu that opens,
select the menu command Insert New Object > Communication network.
The "Insert Object(s) - <...>" dialog box opens.
3. Click the "Assign Device Type" button.
The "Insert Object(s) - Assign Device Type" dialog box opens. You can find additional
information in the section "Insert Object - Assign Device Type" dialog box (Page 94).
4. To set the network properties, select the inserted MODBUS network in the right window
and right-click. Select the entry Object Properties in the displayed shortcut menu.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 101
Functions
8.3 Device management

5. Enter the device-specific information in the "Communication" tab of the Properties dialog
for the MODBUS network.

MODBUS communication type: Serial or IrDA (infrared)

Serial The interface must be set accordingly on the PC station.
IrDA No additional setting required.
Once the device is within range, it is available for MODBUS communication.
Only one infrared device can be coupled to MODBUS at a given time. Several
devices can be coupled under Windows.
Response time General timeout within which the device is allowed to report. If the timeout is too
long, the communication is slowed. If it is too short, some devices may not be
found.

6. To check if the correct network and the correct port are assigned to the COM interface,
double-click the "PC" object in the right window. Select the "COM interface" object in HW
Config, and select the Object Properties menu command in the shortcut menu.
Note
The COM port is almost always "1" for notebooks. Since most PCs have two COM ports,
you have to specify which port the device is connected to in this tab.

7. To insert the MODBUS device, select the "MODBUS network" object in the right window
and right-click. In the displayed shortcut menu, select the Insert New Object > Object
command.
In the displayed dialog box, enter the name of the MODBUS device.
8. To set the device address, select the inserted MODBUS device in the right window and
right-click. Select the entry Object Properties in the displayed shortcut menu.
9. Enter the device-specific information (MODBUS address 0-247) in the "Communication"
tab of the Properties dialog for the MODBUS device.
10.To change the device address, select the inserted MODBUS device in the right window
and then select the Object Properties menu command in the shortcut menu. Select the
"Communication" tab in the displayed dialog and enter the new short address.
11.Start SIMATIC PDM by double-clicking the newly inserted MODBUS device in the right
window. Select the relevant device in the tree view (only required the first time the device
is called), and assign parameters for the device.
Note
Multiple PCs in one project
If there are several PCs in your project, you have to define one of them as the current one.
To do this, select the desired "PC" object in the left window and then select the menu
command Options > Define Current PC.

8.3.1.8 Integrating an S7 DSGW gateway

The procedure for integrating an S7 DSGW gateway is described below.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

102 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Functions
8.3 Device management

Requirements
● A project has been created.
● The device description files (EDD) for planned or already installed field devices are available
in SIMATIC PDM.

Integrating an S7 DSGW network component

1. Open the project in the process device network view.
2. Right-click the "Networks" object in the tree structure. In the shortcut menu that opens,
select the menu command Insert New Object > Communication network.
The "Insert Object(s) - <...>" dialog box opens.
3. Click the "Assign Device Type" button.
The "Insert Object(s) - Assign Device Type" dialog box opens. You will find additional
information in the section "Insert Object - Assign Device Type" dialog box (Page 94).
4. To set the network properties, select the inserted ETHERNET network in the right window
and right-click. Select the entry Object Properties from the displayed shortcut menu.
5. In the Properties dialog of the ETHERNET network, enter the device-specific data in the
"Communication" tab.
The subnet ID is the same as was configured in HW Config.
6. To insert the S7 DSGW network component, select the "ETHERNET network" object in the
right window and right-click. In the displayed shortcut menu, select the Insert New Object >
Object command. In the dialog box that opens, enter the name of the S7 DSGW network
component.
7. To set the device address, select the inserted S7 DSGW network component in the right
window and right-click. Select the entry Object Properties from the displayed shortcut menu.
8. Enter the device-specific information (IP address) in the "Communication" tab of the
Properties dialog of the S7 DSGW network component.

Creation of the "PROFIBUS DP network" object

Insert the "PROFIBUS DP network" object into the "S7 DSGW" object.

Importing/creating the project structure

1. Create the plant structure or import the DP structure of a project.
2. Configure the communication properties of the "PROFIBUS DP network" object.
– Subnet ID (the same ID that was configured in HW Config)
– PROFIBUS CP slot (slot number of the CP DP master)
– DP master address (DP address of the CP DP master)

Communication
Check whether communication is possible (e.g. Upload to PG/PC, download to device, online
view).

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 103
Functions
8.3 Device management

8.3.1.9 Integrating a HART server network

You can use SIMATIC PDM to configure HART devices for the following networks:
● Multiplexer networks
– Multiplexer network with panel (for example, MTL multiplexer)
– Multiplexer network without panel (for example, P+F multiplexer)
● Wireless Hart gateway
You configure a wireless HART gateway as a HART multiplexer.
You need a HART server application in the project to integrate and manage these networks.
You can find detailed information on the HART server in the description or the online help for
this product.
● You can address multiplexers using the HART server. You can obtain more information
from the device manufacturers.
● The HART server of SIMATIC PDM does not support multimaster operation. Jobs have to
be coordinated to avoid conflicts. The coordination must take place on the multiplexer
network level.

Requirement
● A HART server is installed on the computer.
● A multiplexer network has been integrated in the HART server.
● A project has been created in the SIMATIC Manager.
● The HART network is physically connected to the PC station.
Note
Integrating a HART multiplexer network
In the HART server, a project has to be created for the multiplexer in order for the
configuration data of the multiplex to be available in the process device network view.

Starting the HART server application

Note
HART server
The HART server application should always be open before you configure or integrate HART
devices.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

104 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Functions
8.3 Device management

You have the following options for starting the HART server application:
● In SIMATIC Manager, select the menu command Options > SIMATIC PDM > HART server.
● In the Windows taskbar, select the menu command Start > Programs > HART server >
HART server (path of the HART server created by SIMATIC PDM setup).
Note
Network address of the HART multiplexer
Enter the network address of the HART multiplexer in the HART server application when
you create an I/O system in the HART network.

Starting the HART server application for the first time

To configure communication between SIMATIC PDM and the HART server, proceed as follows:
1. Select the HART server project. Select the menu command File > Preferences.
The "HART Server Preferences" dialog box opens.
2. In the "New Configuration Will Use" section, select the check box according to your settings
in SIMATIC PDM.
3. Apply this setting also to the existing project, if required. After it has been applied to an
existing project, the devices must be read in again with "Learn".

Note
SIMATIC PDM default settings
The default settings for HART communication in SIMATIC PDM correspond to the "8 char
(HART 5), 32 char (HART 6 +)" check box.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 105
Functions
8.3 Device management

Configuring the HART server

1. Select the HART server project. Right-click and select the shortcut menu command Add
Network. In the dialog box that opens, select the type of network through which the objects
are connected:
– Single Port RS485
– Single Serial Port
– TCP/UDP
2. Enter a name in the "Network Properties" field.
SIMATIC Manager later identifies the network based on this name.
Set the properties of the interface under "Properties" and confirm your entries with "OK".
The network is inserted in the project.
Note
TAG names
Ensure that the TAG names of the components do not contain a "." (dot).

3. You can read in the multiplexer data automatically or configure them manually.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

106 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Functions
8.3 Device management

– Automatic reading:
Select the higher-level object. Right-click and select the shortcut menu command Learn.
All data (multiplexers and devices) of the selected object are read. A dialog box shows
the progress.
While the addresses (multiplexer, etc.) are being checked, the status of all assigned
addresses changes from "not responding" to "responding". If this does not happen, there
is a connection error, such as incorrect polarity.
Note
Learning process in a HART server project
You can start the learning process on any level.
● When you select a network, you start the learning process for the entire configuration
tree.
● If you select a panel, you start the learning process for the selected partial
configuration, meaning for the instruments below the panel level.

Figure 8-2 Example 1: HART server project with serial multiplexers

Figure 8-3 Example 2: HART server project with wireless HART gateway

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 107
Functions
8.3 Device management

– Manual configuration:
If you want to create the configuration manually, select the project, followed by the
shortcut menu command Add Device (or Add IO-System for Ethernet networks). Enter
the required information in the dialog box.
Continue this procedure until all the devices have been configured.
The HART server automatically checks whether a HART multiplexer can be reached at
the selected address:
- If you reach a HART multiplexer, its properties are displayed.
- Otherwise, a message is displayed stating that no connection could be established.
HART multiplexer with panel: Configure the address information for the panel before
you configure the HART devices.

Inserting a HART server in a multiplexer network

1. Check whether the HART server is started.
2. Open the project in the process device network view.
3. Right-click and select the following shortcut menu command: Insert New Object >
Communication network.
The "Insert Object - <Networks...>" dialog box opens.
4. Click the button "Assign Device Type" > Object.
The "Insert Object - <Networks...>" dialog box opens. Select "HART server" as the network
type and click the "Assign Device Type" button.
5. Select the following shortcut menu command: SIMATIC PDM > Synchronize.
If you select the "Object with all subordinate objects and networks" option, all devices and
multiplexers detected in the HART server are automatically applied to the project.
The hierarchy is transferred to the SIMATIC Manager. The levels shown there depend on
the selected multiplexer (e.g. one or two levels).
6. In the process device network view of SIMATIC Manager, insert the HART server in the
HART multiplexer network and edit the individual devices.

Configuring the devices

Note the following:
● You can start a learning process for identification of the devices on the multiplexer and
assign the device description files (EDD) automatically.
● You can manually configure the multiplexer and the devices. For this purpose, the devices
and the computer must be connected and the device names and addresses must be known.

Changing the configuration

If, for example, you change an existing multiplexer network by inserting a new device or
replacing a device (must be followed by reconfiguration in the HART server), you can compare
the changes in the HART server with the menu command Edit > SIMATIC PDM >
Synchronize. The synchronization function takes into account the following:
● New hierarchy and devices are inserted.
● Hierarchies and devices that no longer exist are removed.
● Renamed devices are also renamed in PDM.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

108 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Functions
8.3 Device management

Wireless HART device on a Wireless HART gateway

Wireless HART devices are integrated into HART multiplexer networks the same way as HART
devices.

SITRANS SITRANS
AW210 AW200

PDM

Wireless
HART
IE/WSN-
PA LINK Ethernet

SITRANS SITRANS SITRANS

P280 TF280 AW210

Renaming devices downstream from a HART server project

If you want to rename a device on a HART multiplexer, observe the order in which the actions
must be performed:
1. Open the device with SIMATIC PDM.
2. Enter new TAG in PDM.
3. Select the following shortcut menu command: SIMATIC PDM > Download to device...
4. Save in PDM.
Saving automatically applies the changes to the HART server.

Additional information
Information on configuring the HART server application supplied with PDM can be found in
the online help HART Server Help(Start > Programs > HART Server > HART Server Help).
For information on the structure, configuration, and commissioning of wireless HART devices
on an IE/WSN PA link (WSN-PA Link link), refer to the following documentation:
● Operating instructions titled SIMATIC NET; IE/WSN PA Link
● Operating instructions titled SIMATIC NET; IE/WSN PA Link (Compact)

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 109
Functions
8.3 Device management

8.3.1.10 Compact PROFIBUS device (sensors and actuators)

Procedure
To integrate a PROFIBUS device (PROFIBUS DP device, PROFIBUS PA device or
PROFIBUS remote I/O), proceed as follows:

(WKHUQHW

352),%86'3 352),%86'3

352),%86'3 352),%863$ 352),%86'3 352),%863$

Creating a network
1. Open the process device network view in SIMATIC Manager.
2. Select the "Networks" folder in the tree structure in the left window and select the Insert
New Object > Object command from the shortcut menu.
The "Insert Object" dialog box opens.
3. Click the "Assign Device Type" button.

Inserting a PROFIBUS device or remote I/O

Follow the steps below to insert objects into higher-level objects one after the other.

Higher-level object Object to be inserted

"Networks" folder Type of network via which the field devices are connected
to the automation system (e.g., PROFIBUS DP network).
PROFIBUS DP network PROFIBUS DP device / PROFIBUS PA device
Header module (selection: remote I/O) Modules (selection: module)
Modules (selection: module) Field device (selection: HART device)

1. Select the higher-level object in the tree structure in the window on the right.
2. In the shortcut menu, select the menu command Insert New Object > Object.
The dialog box "<... SIMATIC PDM – Insert Object(s)" opens.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

110 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Functions
8.3 Device management

3. In the dialog box that opens, enter the name of the process tag.
Note
Configure the PROFIBUS PA devices directly on the PROFIBUS network if you are using
a PROFIBUS DP/PA coupler. The coupler itself is not configured (the DP/PA couplers with
diagnostic capability as of 6ES7157-0AC84-0XA0 can be configured as a stand-alone
device).

4. As an alternative, you can insert a PROFIBUS-Link (Y-Link or DP/PA-Link) in a

PROFIBUS DP network. After the PROFIBUS-Link , you can insert PROFIBUS devices but
no additional PROFIBUS-Link .
Note
The address of the PROFIBUS device that you set in the "Insert SIMATIC PDM Object(s)"
dialog box can be changed afterwards on the "Communication" tab of the "Object
Properties" dialog box.

Configuring devices with SIMATIC PDM

1. Select the inserted PROFIBUS device in the process device network view.
2. Select the Open object command in the shortcut menu.
SIMATIC PDM opens. The PROFIBUS device is shown in the structure view.
3. Set the required parameters for the function in the parameter table.
4. Make the necessary settings and save the object.

8.3.1.11 Modular PROFIBUS device (remote I/O)

Creating a network
1. Open the process device network view in SIMATIC Manager.
2. Double-click the "Networks" object in the right window to insert a PROFIBUS DP network.
Select the "Networks" folder in the left window, and select the Insert New Object >
Communications Network command in the shortcut menu.
The "Insert Object(s) - <...>" dialog box opens.
3. Click the "Assign device type" button.
The "Insert Object - Assign Device Type" dialog box opens.
You can find additional information on this in the section ""Insert Object - Assign Device
Type" dialog box (Page 94)".
4. Select the PROFIBUS DP network from the tree structure.
5. Click "OK".
The PROFIBUS DP network is inserted.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 111
Functions
8.3 Device management

Adding remote I/O, module, and PROFIBUS device

Follow the steps below to insert objects into higher-level objects one after the other.

Higher-level object Object to be inserted

PROFIBUS DP network Header module (selection: remote I/O)
Header module (selection: remote I/O) Modules (selection: module)
Modules (selection: module) Field device (selection: PROFIBUS device)

1. Select the higher-level object in the tree structure in the window on the left.
2. In the shortcut menu, select the menu command Insert New Object > Object.
The "Insert Object(s) - <...>" dialog box opens.
3. Make the following settings for the inserted object.
You can find additional information on this in the section "Inserting objects (Page 92)".
4. Select the object. Select the Object properties command in the shortcut menu.
The "Properties - <Inserted object>" dialog box opens.
5. Select the "Communication" tab.
6. Make the necessary settings depending on the inserted object in the input fields:
– Remote I/O: Enter the PROFIBUS address.
– Module (device module): Enter the slot.
– PROFIBUS devices: Do not make changes to the channel settings.
7. Repeat these steps until all remote I/O, modules, and PROFIBUS devices have been added.

Configuring devices with SIMATIC PDM

1. Select the PROFIBUS DP network in the process device network view, which is of a higher
level than the added PROFIBUS devices.
2. Select the Open object command in the shortcut menu.
SIMATIC PDM opens. The PROFIBUS DP network is represented in the structure view.
You can find the remote I/O, modules, and PROFIBUS devices by opening the tree
structure.
3. Assign a function individually to the added objects (corresponding with the actual
configuration in HW Config and the connected equipment):
– Open the object by selecting its icon in the structure view.
– Select the parameters required for the function in the parameter table.
Make the required settings and save the object.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

112 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Functions
8.3 Device management

Downloading
To transfer the configuration and parameters, select the "<Remote I/O>" object and then select
the Device > Upload to PC/PG... menu command.

Note
The automatic detection of the <modules> depends on the type of <remote I/O>, the
<modules>, and the device description.

8.3.1.12 Connecting a field device to PROFINET

To integrate distributed I/O devices (e.g. ET 200M) or links for connecting intelligent DP or PA
field devices (e.g. IE/PB link) via PROFINET, follow these steps:

Creating a network
1. Open the process device network view in SIMATIC Manager.
2. Select the "Networks" folder in the tree structure in the left window and select the Insert
New Object > Object command from the shortcut menu.
The "Insert Object" dialog box opens.
3. Click the "Assign Device Type" button.

Inserting a field device or remote I/O

Follow the steps below to insert objects into higher-level objects one after the other.

Higher-level object Object to be inserted

"Networks" folder Type of network via which the field devices are connected
to the automation system (e.g., PROFINET network).
PROFINET network Header module (selection: remote I/O)
Header module (selection: remote I/O) Modules (selection: module)
Modules (selection: module) Field device (selection: HART device)

1. Select the higher-level object in the tree structure in the window on the right.
2. In the shortcut menu, select the menu command Insert New Object > Object.
The dialog box "<... SIMATIC PDM – Insert Object(s)" opens.
3. In the dialog box that opens, enter the name of the process tag.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 113
Functions
8.3 Device management

Alternatively, you can add a IE/PB-Link to a PROFINET network. Downstream of the IE/PB-
Link , you can then insert PROFIBUS devices . IE/PB-Links are only supported in HW Config
in V8.0.

Note
The address of the PROFINET device that you set in the "Insert SIMATIC PDM Object(s)"
dialog box can be changed afterwards on the "Communication" tab of the "Object Properties"
dialog box.

Network topology

352),1(7

352),1(7GHYLFH 5HPRWH,2 ,(3%/LQN

352),%86'3
+$57 '33$FRXSOHU

352),%863$

Configuring devices with SIMATIC PDM

1. Select the inserted PROFINET device in the process device network view.
2. Select the Open Object command from the shortcut menu.
SIMATIC PDM opens and the PROFINET device is shown in the structure view.
3. Set the required parameters for the function in the parameter table.
4. Make the necessary settings and save the object.

8.3.1.13 HART device on remote I/O

You can connect the HART devices to a suitable remote I/O module.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

114 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Functions
8.3 Device management

Remote I/O with HART devices (PROFIBUS DP)

(WKHUQHW
352),%86'3

Creating the PDM basic folder called "Networks"

1. Open the process device network view in SIMATIC Manager.
2. If the "Networks" object has not been inserted in the tree structure, select the menu
command Insert New Object and select the "Networks" object.
Note
PDM basic folder called "Networks"
SIMATIC PDM licenses must be available in the project when this folder is created.

Creating a communications network

1. Open the process device network view in SIMATIC Manager.
2. Select the "Networks" folder in the tree structure in the left window and select the Insert
New Object > Object command from the shortcut menu.
The "Insert Object - <...>" dialog box opens.
3. Click the "Assign Device Type" button.

Inserting an object (creating a communications network; remote I/O, module, and HART device)
Follow the steps below to insert objects into higher-level objects one after the other.

Higher-level object Object to be inserted

"Networks" folder Type of network via which the field devices are connected
to the automation system (e.g., PROFIBUS DP network or
PROFINET).
PROFIBUS DP network Header module (selection: remote I/O)

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 115
Functions
8.3 Device management

Higher-level object Object to be inserted

Header module (selection: remote I/O) Modules (selection: module)
Modules (selection: module) Field device (selection: HART device)

1. Select the higher-level object in the tree structure in the window on the left.
2. In the shortcut menu, select the menu command Insert New Object > Object.
The "Insert Object - <...>" dialog box opens.
3. Make the following settings for the inserted object.
You can find additional information on this in the section "Inserting objects (Page 92)".
4. Select the object. In the shortcut menu, select the menu command Object Properties.
The dialog box "<Inserted Object> Properties" opens.
5. Select the "Communication" tab.
6. Apply the following settings to the input boxes:
– For the remote I/O: Enter the PROFIBUS address or the PROFINET IP address.
– For the module (HART module): Enter the slot.
– For the HART device: Do not make changes to the channel settings.
7. Repeat these steps until all remote I/O, modules, and HART devices have been added.

Configuring devices with SIMATIC PDM

1. In the process device network view, select the PROFIBUS DP network or the PROFINET
network that is the higher-level network of the inserted HART devices.
2. Select the Open object command in the shortcut menu.
SIMATIC PDM opens. The PROFIBUS DP network or the PROFINET network is
represented in the structure view.
You can find the remote I/O, modules, and HART devices by opening the tree structure.
3. Assign a function individually to the added objects (corresponding with the actual
configuration in HW Config and the connected equipment):
– Open the object by selecting its icon in the structure view.
– Select the parameters required for the function in the parameter table.
Make the required settings and save the object.
Note
Objects can be detected automatically if an online connection exists to the devices. The
automatic detection of the modules depends on the type of remote I/O, the modules
used, and on the device description.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

116 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Functions
8.3 Device management

Downloading
To transfer the configuration and parameters, select the "<Remote I/O>" object and then select
the Device > Upload to PC/PG... menu command.

Note
Slot function settings
The automatic detection of the <modules> depends on the type of <remote I/O>, the
<modules>, and the device description.

Configure lower-level objects

There may be instances where you have to assign a specific device from the catalog to an
object before you can configure lower-level objects. You have to start SIMATIC PDM for the
object to make the assignment (context-sensitive menu command "Open object").
Example:
You insert a remote I/O and assign the respective device to it, for example, an ET 200iSP
header module. Then, you configure the remote I/O module. Only after you have assigned a
HART-capable module to this module can you insert a channel and a HART device. The pre-
defined module "unused slot" cannot include HART devices or channels.

8.3.1.14 Inserting a HART device at a HART module

The integration procedure is explained using the example of a HART device on an ET 200iSP
HART module:

Inserting a HART device based on the example of an ET 200iSP HART module

1. Position an "IM152-1" you have selected from the hardware catalog under "PROFIBUS DP
\ET 200iSP" at the DP master system.
The detail view in the table below the graphic object displays the slots of ET 200iSP.
2. Insert a HART module "4 AI 2WIRE HART" from the hardware catalog under
"PROFIBUS DP\ET 200iSP\IM 152-1\AI", into a free slot.
The HART module with 4 channels is shown in the detail view.
3. Place the object listed in "...\AI\4 AI 2WIRE HART\HART field device" in the detail view.
The PDM dialog "Device selection (Reassign) (Page 94)" opens.
4. Assign the device type to the inserted device (device description).

8.3.1.15 Integrating an FF field device

FF devices can be configured using SIMATIC PCS 7 from PCS 7 version 8.0 Update 1.
Information on this can be found in the following documentation:
SIMATIC Process Control System PCS 7, PCS 7 - FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 117
Functions
8.3 Device management

8.3.2 Field devices with redundant bus connection

8.3.2.1 Connecting field devices to a redundant bus system

Redundant connection of field devices with SIMATIC PDM

Some field devices allow redundant connection in the automation system. If information about
this feature is stored in the device description, SIMATIC PDM can recognize this.
You can determine whether this feature can be configured in the "Properties" dialog box of the
process device network view. With these objects, you will see a "Redundancy" area in the
"Communication" tab.

Procedure
1. Configure an object for each of the bus addresses of a field device that can be connected
redundantly.
Note
Applying the configuration
You are allowed to fully configure one object only (this is referred to as the "master field
device" in the following). The other object must not contain substructures. This also applies
if redundant partners have been configured in HW Config. In the case of remote I/O (e.g.,
P+F LB/FB RemoteIO), therefore, you should configure the modules in HW Config only
after the redundancy selection.
For the second object, you only need to configure the bus address (this is referred to as
the "partner field device" from this point forward). You can display only the master field
device on the partner field device. You can find information on this in the section
""Communication" tab (Page 197)".

2. Open the "Object Properties" dialog for the configured master field device in the process
device network view.
3. Open the "Communication" tab.
4. In the "Redundancy" section, click "Select Object".
The list of configured devices opens.
5. Select the partner field device.
6. Click "OK".
The list of configured devices closes. The "Enable redundancy" check box is selected in
the "Redundancy" section and the partner field device is displayed.

Result
The master is the object on which the substructures are displayed, and redundancy can be
deactivated again (deactivation only works if the redundant partners have not been configured
in HW Config). No substructures are displayed at the partner.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

118 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Functions
8.3 Device management

Canceling redundancy
● Delete the partner field device.
● The master maintains all substructures and loses its master status.

Additional information
● Section ""Select object" dialog box (Page 119)"
● Section ""Properties - Find object" dialog box (Page 119)"

8.3.2.2 "Select object" dialog box

Use this dialog box to select the required comparison objects or partner objects.

8.3.2.3 "Properties - Find object" dialog box

Some field devices can be connected to a redundant bus system. Two field device objects are
created for these field devices.
The dialog box opens only if a partner object has been specified for the selected field device
object.

Note
The partner object is labeled in the table after the dialog box opens.
● The dialog box provides information only.
● You cannot make any changes in it.

See also
Connecting field devices to a redundant bus system (Page 118)

8.3.3 Using unspecified PROFIBUS PA devices as placeholders

This method can be used to configure PROFIBUS devices in a system, even though the type
of device is not yet set at the time of configuration.
Create a placeholder for unknown devices. You should know the profile of the device to be
used in the form of manufacturer information.
Device profiles:
● Profile3
● Profile I&M

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 119
Functions
8.3 Device management

Basic preparation
1. Insert a number of objects for PROFIBUS profile devices of the appropriate type at the
desired addresses in the process device network view in a PROFIBUS PA network.
Examples:
– Sensor > Temperature > PROFILE3 > Profile3
– Siemens > SIEMENS > Profile I&M
2. Configure the ID data for the PROFIBUS devices in the object properties:
– TAG
– Description
– Message

Commissioning PROFIBUS devices

1. Connect the PROFIBUS devices in the automation system.
2. Select a device configured as a placeholder in the process device network view or in HW
Config.
3. Download the configuration to the device (section "Download to device (Page 186)").
4. Assign the required device description to the device (section "Device selection (Reassign)
(Page 233)"). Recommendation: Use the "Device identification" function.
5. Where required modify the device's online parameters.
6. Load the data from the device into the configuration (section "Upload to PG/PC
(Page 188)").
7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 until all devices are configured.
8. Save the data in the project.

8.3.4 Creating typicals for parameters (import without ID data)

You can use the following procedure to assign the parameters of an already configured device
to identical devices.

Procedure
1. Open the process device network view.
2. Select a configured device or the network in which the configured devices are located.
3. In SIMATIC Manager, select the menu command Edit > SIMATIC PDM > Export.
4. Select the data for export.
You can find information on this in the section "Exporting (Page 175)".
5. Perform the export.
A set of device-specific data is created for each device.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

120 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Functions
8.3 Device management

6. Select a device to which new parameters are to be assigned in the process device network
view or in HW Config.
7. Select the Import... command in the shortcut menu.
The "Import..." dialog box opens.
8. In the "Import file" input box, enter the XML file that contains the data for the required device.
The check for consistent device types is performed.
– Clear the "Import Identification data" check box.
You can find information on this in the section "Importing (Page 179)".
9. Click the "Import" button.
The data record of the import file is not imported into the device completely.
The following data is excluded from import:
– Device name
– Description
– Message

8.3.5 Replacing devices

You have several options for replacing devices with SIMATIC PDM.

Replacement of a device with one of the same type

This type of replacement involves replacement with compatible devices.
The device to be replaced can be operated with the device description of the device to be
integrated (for example, after a firmware update).
● The configuration can be downloaded to the device you want to integrate.
You can find information on this in the section "Download to device (Page 186)".

Replacing a device with a similar one

This type of replacement involves incompatible devices.
Parameters for which identical names are entered in the device description are applied in the
configuration of the new device.
● You can find information on this in the section "Device selection (Reassign) (Page 233)"

Replacement via address change

Note
Typical service scenario
Manufacturers generally set devices to the service address 126 or deliver them with a user-
specific configuration.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 121
Functions
8.3 Device management

This type of replacement involves compatible devices. You can use this function to assign the
address of a configured device to a device with the service address 126.
● The device to be replaced can be operated with the device description of the device to be
integrated (for example, after a firmware update).
● The configuration can be loaded to the device to be integrated.
Procedure (for PROFIBUS devices and FF devices)

Note
Restart
Changing the address will restart the device.

● Option 1
– You use the "LifeList" function in order to find the replacement device.
– You assign the configuration to the replacement device via the LifeList function "Assign
address and TAG...".
You can find additional information on this in the section ""LifeList - Assign address and
TAG..." dialog (Page 152)".
● Option 2
– You use the "Assign address and TAG..." function for a configured device in SIMATIC
PDM.
– In the "Online" area enter the address of the replacement device located in the system
(with service address 126).
You can find additional information on this in the section "Assign address and TAG
(Page 190)".

8.3.6 Inserting plant-specific documents for process mode

You can assign up to 10 documents to one PDM object in the Document Manager.
To assign the documents, select the menu command Device > Object Properties > Document
Manager.
To open the documents, select the SIMATIC PDM menu command Help > Document
Manager. Use the mouse to select the required document from the submenu.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

122 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Functions
8.3 Device management

Requirements
The following requirements must be met in order to assign and display documents:
● The documents are stored locally on the PC or are located on a connected network drive
(designated by means of a letter).
Connections involving http, ftp, and UNC paths are not supported.
● A display program is assigned to the document type in Windows on the PC.
● The user who wants to open a particular document has read rights to the document (as a
minimum).

Procedure
To assign specific documents to a device, proceed as follows:
1. Open the object properties of the device.
2. Select the "Document Manager" tab.
Rows for a maximum of 10 documents are displayed.

Actions on the "Document Manager" tab

Action To execute
File 1. Click the "..." button.
2. Navigate to the document required.
3. Click "Open".
The storage path and file name of the selected file is displayed in
the "File" box.
Title Enter a name for the document.
Test whether a document can be displayed. Select the menu command Open.
Remove a document from the list Select the menu command Delete.

8.3.7 Operating modes of field devices

Modes
Each device supports specific, different operating modes which can or cannot be toggled using
SIMATIC PDM (depends on the interlock setup of the device).
The following operating modes are available:

Operating mode Description

Automatic The device is operating in cyclic mode on an AS master or is ready for this mode.
Manual The device is still operating in cyclic mode, however, the AS master rejects all
additional process values. Working information is transferred "in situ" to the de‐
vice or by means of a dialog box in SIMATIC PDM.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 123
Functions
8.3 Device management

Operating mode Description

Simulation SIMATIC PDM provides a dialog box where you can set up the device as follows:
● The default sensor values are valid as output variables and are transferred
to the AS master
or
● The actuation information for actuators is specified by SIMATIC PDM. The
reaction is similar to that of "Manual" mode.
Test mode The test mode represents an extended type of internal simulation in the actual
device. For sensors, for example, the actual sensor value is manipulated instead
of the output value to the AS master. All calculations generated in auto mode are
executed in the device and the device transfers all of its configured diagnostics
messages to the AS master.
Failsafe The device goes into the failsafe mode if an error was detected during acquisition
of a process variable.

The diagnostics icon of the device identifies the current operating mode.

Additional information
You can find an overview of the diagnostics icons displayed in SIMATIC PDM in the section
"Overview of Device Icons (Page 140)".

8.3.8 Deleting devices

An object is deleted from all the SIMATIC PDM configuration views as soon as you delete it
from any of the following views:
● HW Config
Devices that have been inserted in a project via HW Config can only be deleted in HW
Config (Edit > Delete menu command).
● Process device network view and process device plant view
You can delete devices used once in both process device views. The synchronization
between the process device views is done automatically.
Note
Exception of objects used more than once
Objects that can be used more than once (e.g., a device that can be configured with
redundancy)
● To remove redundancy, delete the partner configured as the slave. If you want to delete
both redundant partners, both objects must be manually deleted.

8.3.9 Assigning parameters and downloading to devices

You assign parameters to devices in the parameter table.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

124 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Functions
8.3 Device management

The data relating to entries and changes made in SIMATIC PDM is always created offline
(saved in the project data). The data does not take effect in the device until the "Load to
Devices" function has been performed.

"Download to device" function

Downloads all device variables of a device object from the offline data storage to the devices.
You can find information on this in the section ""Download to device - ..." dialog box
(Page 187)".

Additional information
● Section "Parameter table (Page 74)"
● You will find information on FF devices in the section: "AUTOHOTSPOT" as well as in the
PCS 7 FOUNDATION Fieldbus commissioning manual.

8.3.10 Interconnecting and downloading FF devices

8.3.10.1 "Interconnection Editor" dialog box

Note
Menu command "Start Connection Editor"
The "Start Connection Editor" menu command is only enabled in HW Config for the bus link
(FF Link or Compact FF Link) if the "PDM Foundation Fieldbus" license key is available.

You organize the interconnections for internal FOUNDATION Fieldbus communication in this
dialog. The automation system does not participate in this communication. The name of this
function is "Control in the Field" (CiF). CiF can be used to execute technological functions in
an FF segment.
Configure each CiF interconnection (hereafter referred to simply as interconnection) in the
"Connection Editor" dialog.

Internal device interconnections

FF devices have internal device blocks, such as measuring sensor, controller. The internal
device interconnection of these blocks means that there is no communication load on the FF
segment.

Structure
The "Connection Editor" dialog box is divided into the following columns:

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 125
Functions
8.3 Device management

"Inputs and interconnections" area

● "Input" column
This column shows the FF devices and the available inputs in the network view of the FF
segment. Inputs are the target of an interconnection.
● "Internal interconnection" column
This column displays a list of interconnections that were configured for the FF segment.
Layout: Output of the FF device > Function Block > Signal
"Outputs" area
● "Output" column
This column shows the FF devices in the network view of the FF segment and the available
outputs. Outputs are the source of an interconnection.

Buttons

Button Function
Add interconnec‐ Click this button to add an interconnection to the column "Interconnections".
tion
Delete intercon‐ Click this button to delete an interconnection.
nection
Close Click this button to close the dialog box.
A message informs you if changes have not yet been saved.
Save Click this button to save configured interconnections in the SIMATIC project.
Download Click this button to open the CiF interconnection.
NOTICE!
Use this button only if no other changes have been made to the FF segment since
the last download of the device.

Icons

Icon Displayed object

FF segment

Bus link (FF Link or Compact FF Link)

FF device

Block within an FF device

Inputs and outputs Status

Analog input Not interconnected

Analog input Interconnected

Digital input Not interconnected

Digital input Interconnected

Analog output Not interconnected

Analog output Interconnected

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

126 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Functions
8.3 Device management

Icon Displayed object

Digital output Not interconnected

Digital output Interconnected

Locked inputs or outputs

Inputs or outputs can be locked for the interconnection. Causes:
● The input or output is interconnected internally.
● An I/O address from the process image is already assigned in HW Config for the input or
output.
You can find information about this in the Process Control System PCS 7, FOUNDATION
Fieldbus documentation; section "How to replace an FF device".

Example of the representation:

The symbol indicates a locked input.

8.3.10.2 Downloading objects in the FF segment

You have to download the following data for the function of the FF devices in a system:
● CPU data
– Hardware configuration of a CPU with connected FF segment (to the CPU)
– Program and connections (to the CPU)
● Schedule, bus parameters and interconnections (to the FF segment)
● Device parameters (to all FF devices)

Note
Downloading function blocks
It is not necessary to download an entire device if there are only minor changes.
You can download a group of function blocks or one individual function block for an FF device.

Replacing devices
You have the following options for replacing devices with SIMATIC PDM:
● Replacement of a device with one of the same type
● Replacing a device with a similar one

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 127
Functions
8.3 Device management

Requirements
You will have to read in the device parameters to the Engineering System before you assign
the parameters of the FF devices for the first time.

Note
Observe the following if you have inserted new FF devices on the FF segment or if you want
to use the parameters of additional function blocks:
● First, configure all interconnections.
● If the complete FF segment is loaded (option for bus link: "Always load FF Link and FF
devices"), loading is briefly stopped.
● If the FF segment is being loaded incrementally (option for bus link: "Only load FF Link and
FF devices when modified"), the loading continues.
● If necessary, correct the macro cycle settings.

Download
Use the following menu commands to download the respective data to the system:

Menu command CPU data Schedule, bus parameters and in‐ Device pa‐
terconnections rameters
Always download the hardware config‐ Hardware Downloading -
uration in HW Config for the selected configura‐ Note:
CPU: tion is Downloading FF segments can on‐
PLC > Download to Module downloa‐ ly be carried out via HW Config.
ded
The menu command PLC > Compile Program - -
and Download Objects... in the SIMAT‐ and con‐
IC Manager. nections
are down‐
loaded
Select the bus link in SIMATIC PDM - - All FF devi‐
Device > Download to device ces are
Select the following check box in the downloa‐
"Download to device" dialog: ded.
"Object with all subordinate objects
and networks".
Select the bus link in SIMATIC PDM - - The FF de‐
Device > Download to device Only when replacing a device with vice is loa‐
Select the following check box in the one of the same type: ded
"Download to device" dialog: Select the check box "Load Sched‐
"Object with all subordinate objects". ule to Device".

Note
You can download changes to the automation system in "RUN" mode.
Read the following paragraph: Settings for "Load FF Segment"

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

128 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Functions
8.3 Device management

Settings for "Load FF segment"

In HW Config, you can adapt the object properties of the bus link that are taken into
consideration when loading the AS.
Perform the following steps:
1. Open the hardware configuration in SIMATIC Manager.
2. Open the object properties of the bus link.
3. Select the "Load FF Segment" tab.
4. Make the settings in accordance with the following table:
Note
Bus link - downloading changes after the "Calculate schedule" action
If you have configured the setting "Only load FF Link and FF devices when modified" in the
bus link, you must observe the following:
● Only a complete download is possible after executing the action "Calculate Schedule"
in "Properties - Foundation Fieldbus -> Macro cycle".
● A complete download is made possible by changing the bus link parameter assignment
to "Always load FF Link and FF devices".

Check box Application Effect

Only load FF Exclude FF segment during If only changes are downloaded, the FF segment
Link and FF de‐ AS loading continues running during loading.
vices when Example: You configure no
modified changes for the FF seg‐
ment.
Always load FF Complete download of an The FF segment is stopped when it is downloaded
Link and FF de‐ FF segment completely.
vices Recommendation
After a complete download of an FF segment, se‐
lect the option "Only load FF Link and FF devices
when modified".
Exclude FF Link Function for commissioning This function supports you during commissioning
and FF devices only of other bus links on the same PROFIBUS.
from loading NOTICE!
STOP of the FF segment possible
Undefined states may occur in the FF segment
when you use this setting.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 129
Functions
8.4 Communication

8.4 Communication

8.4.1 Saving/reading the device data

The "Download to device (Page 186)" and "Upload to PG/PC (Page 188)" functions are used
to update the data storage system.
● The "Upload to PG/PC" function is used to load all device tags of a device object from the
device to the offline data storage.
● The "Download to device" function is used to load all configurable device tags of a device
object from the offline data storage to the device.

Procedure
To download data in the network view, plant view or PDM parameter view, follow these steps:
1. Select the device and then select the Download to device or Upload to PG/PC menu
command from the shortcut menu.
2. Select the required settings in the open "Download to device" or "Upload to PG/PC" dialog.
3. Click "OK" to save your entries.
During the download, a dialog is displayed that shows the objects you have edited beforehand
in a tree structure similar to that of SIMATIC Manager. If any errors occur for a device, the
function is aborted for this device. The action continues where possible.
The dialog is updated during the load process. As long as the operation is active, the title bar
displays the "In progress" status and the "Result" status after the operation has been
completed.

Loading options
Within the configuration layer of the SIMATIC Manager you can download the data of
configured devices to the entire plant, to units, or to single devices, or upload this data to the
PG/PC without having to open SIMATIC PDM separately for each device.
You have the following options for loading data:
● "Download to device" or "Upload to PG/PC" of the selected device
● "Download to device" or "Upload to PG/PC" of the selected device and the devices on the
first level under the selected device (only for remote I/O)
Note
At least two connections must be supported simultaneously for remote I/Os to enable
communication with the connected HART process devices.

● Download to device/Upload to PG/PC of the selected device and of all the devices under
the selected device

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

130 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Functions
8.4 Communication

Errors and messages

During the loading, all errors and messages are shown immediately. Any errors occurring in
a device do not cause the entire action to be aborted; they only apply to the device that is
currently being processed. Errors and other messages are saved and can be displayed at a
later time.
Suppressing message dialogs
You can suppress message dialogs during the loading. Select the "Execute 'Load' without info
dialogs" check box. You can find additional information using the Options > SIMATIC PDM >
Settings > The "Load" tab (Page 260) menu command.

Loading time
The time required to load the parameter assignment depends on the device in question, so it
can take quite some time to load data from multiple field devices.
The total time required for this process depends on the following parameters:
● Number of devices
● Communication mode
● The volume of parameters to be transferred
Note
User action required
There are some devices for which confirmation of loading operations is required.
If none of the devices you are using requires any action on the part of the user during
loading, you can start the loading process before an extended absence.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 131
Functions
8.5 Export / Import

8.5 Export / Import

8.5.1 Introduction
You can export and reimport the configuration and parameter assignment data of projects with
PDM objects to a different project or a different PDM computer, for example.
You can export individual objects as well as modular software objects or modular hardware
objects and networks with embedded objects (e.g., field devices).

Export
You can export object data from the following environments:
● From SIMATIC PDM
● In the process device network view in SIMATIC Manager
● In the process device plant view in SIMATIC Manager
● In HW Config

You can export the configuration and parameter assignment data of the following objects:
● Devices
● Modular devices (e.g., remote I/O stations)
● Networks with subordinate devices

Files are created during the export based on the export object:
● Parameter export files
● Structure export files

Note
Devices with a redundant interconnection are configured multiple times in the network and
exported in the same number during the export of a network (you can find information on this
in the section ""Select object" dialog box (Page 119)").

Parameter export
If only one object is selected for export, only one parameter export is performed to the export
directory.
Parameter export files are created only for device objects. No parameter export files are stored
for networks or similar objects.
The parameter export file is labeled with the prefix "Param$".

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

132 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Functions
8.5 Export / Import

Structure export
If a set of objects (an object with subobjects) is selected for export, a structure export is also
performed to the export directory.
Along with the structure export file, a folder of the same name containing the parameter export
files of the exported objects is then generated.
Along with the structure export file, a folder of the same name containing the parameter export
files of the exported objects is generated:
Export directory
● Struct$<Plant-specific device name>$<Date(YYYYMMDD_hhmmss)>.xml
● Directory Struct$<Plant-specific device name>$<Date(YYYYMMDD_hhmmss)
– Param$<Plant-specific device name>$<Date(YYYYMMDD_hhmmss)>.xml
When exporting object structures, a structure export file is created in addition to the parameter
export files of each object. The structure export file contains the object topology information
including all information required to generate the exported object structure again or to expand
an existing object structure. The structure export file is labeled with the prefix "Struct$.

Import
The export of data of a PDM object generates files in XML format. For the import, you can
select an XML file and choose whether a parameter import or structure import is be performed.

Parameter import
Parameter export files can only be imported at device objects or "placeholder objects". A
"placeholder object" is an object that is produced by the "Insert object" command without a
specific type selection.
In principle, the parameter import works as a comparative import.
No objects are deleted by the import process.

Structure import
Structure export files can only be imported for objects of a compatible type or for "placeholder
objects". A "placeholder object" is an object that is produced by the "Insert object" command
without a specific EDD selection.
The structure import works as an additive import. The address or the slot of the object is most
important.
This means that non-existing objects are created, the EDD is assigned, and the parameters
are imported.
If objects already exist, the parameters are imported.
No objects are deleted by the import process.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 133
Functions
8.5 Export / Import

Export/import file (*.xml)

During export, the data is saved in an XML file.
The name of each file generated during the export is structured as follows:
● Parameter export
Param$<plant-specific device name>$<date(YYYYMMDD_hhmmss)>.xml
● Structure export
Struct$<plant-specific device name>$<date(YYYYMMDD_hhmmss)>.xml

Note
The parameter export files are identified with the described prefix only in PDM V8.0.2 and
higher.

Creating a plant-specific HTML format information file (HTML transformation file)

You can control how the parameter export files are formatted by using an HTML format
information file (XSL file for transformation into HTML). You can use the HTML format
information file (XSL file for transformation into HTML) to convert formats, for example, and to
prepare the file for the purpose of using external tools.
To create a plant-specific HTML format information file, use the default file as your starting
point.
Once you have created devices in PDM, you can find the path and name of the HTML
representation file supplied with SIMATIC PDM in the export dialog.
Default setting: <Path>\<Name>.<File format>

● Path: Program Files\Siemens\Automation\SIMATIC_PDM\Templates

● Name: PDM<version>_ExportTransformation
● File format: xsl

Additional information
● Section "Exporting (Page 175)"
● Section "Importing (Page 179)"

8.5.2 Exporting configuration and parameter assignment data

You can run the "Export" function for the following objects:
● Devices
● Modular devices (e.g., remote I/O stations)
● Networks with subordinate devices

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

134 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Functions
8.5 Export / Import

Export environment
You can export object data in the following environments:
● From SIMATIC PDM
● In the process device network view in SIMATIC Manager
● In the process device plant view in SIMATIC Manager
● In HW Config

Procedure
1. Select a PDM object and choose the associated menu command:
– The menu command File > Export... in SIMATIC PDM.
– The shortcut menu command SIMATIC PDM > Export... in SIMATIC Manager, in the
process device network view or process device plant view.
– The shortcut menu command SIMATIC PDM > Export... in HW Config.
2. Make the settings for exporting the device data:
You can find additional information on this in the section ""Export - ..." dialog box
(Page 176)".
3. Click "Start".

Result
The configuration and parameter assignment data for the selected device (or for the devices
that are subordinate to the PDM object) is exported.
The progress of the export is shown in the list of devices during the export process.

Display
The dialog box is updated during the export process.
Status display
● During the process, the display field shows the entry "Export: action started".
● Once the process is complete, the display field shows the entry "Export: action completed
without error".

Message log
The message log shows all warnings, errors and information related to the export. You can
find information on this in the section "Message log (Page 156)".

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 135
Functions
8.5 Export / Import

8.5.3 Importing configuration and parameter assignment data

Depending on the selection, the export generates parameter export files and structure export
files in XML format. For the import, you can select an XML file and choose whether a parameter
import or structure import is be performed.

Import environment
You can import data from the following environments:
● From SIMATIC PDM
● In the process device network view in SIMATIC Manager
● In the process device plant view in SIMATIC Manager
● In HW Config
The import is always started for an object, e.g., via the menu bar or via the shortcut menu in
SIMATIC Manager. The name of the object for which the import dialog was opened appears
in the name field of the dialog.

Object consistency check

A consistency check of the device types and objects is performed automatically during the
import process.
● Imported object
Type of object from which the import file is generated.
● Existing object (target object)
Type of object that is selected in the configuration as the target object of the import.
The remaining steps depend on the results of the check:
● Object types are the same
The import can continue immediately.
The entire import file can be imported to the target object. During import, all the data
contained in the import file is overwritten.
● Object types are different (parameter import)
The import process is interrupted by the following message dialog box:
"Different device types. Only attributes with the same name will be imported."
If you continue the import, you will see the following result:
– No parameters will be deleted or added.
– Only those parameters with the same name will be overwritten on the target object.
● Object types are different (structure import)
The import cannot be started.
Note
Assigned device description file
The target device is not assigned a new device description file.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

136 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Functions
8.5 Export / Import

Procedure
1. Go to one of the specified environments and select the device for which you want data to
be imported from the XML file.
2. Select the relevant menu command in accordance with the environment that you have
decided to use:
– The menu command File > Import... in SIMATIC PDM.
– The shortcut menu command SIMATIC PDM > Import... in the process device network
view or process device plant view in SIMATIC Manager.
– The shortcut menu command SIMATIC PDM > Import... in HW Config.
3. A dialog box opens. In the "Import file" input box, enter the path and location of the XML
file that contains the data you want to import.
The device type consistency check is performed.
4. Select the setting for the "Import identification data" check box.
– "Import identification data" check box activated (default)
The following data of the import file are imported:
- Device name
- Description
- Message
– "Import identification data" check box deactivated
The device name, description, and message are excluded from the import.
5. Select the setting for the "Import device parameters" check box:
– "Import device parameters" check box selected (default)
The data record of the parameter export file is completely imported.
– "Import device parameters" check box cleared
The data record of the parameter export file is not imported.
6. Click the "Start" button.
The status of the import is displayed while it is in progress.

Display
The dialog box is updated during the import.
Status display
● During the process, the display field shows the entry "Import: action started.".
● Once the process is complete, the display field shows the entry "Import: action completed
without error.".

Message log
The message log shows all warnings, errors and information related to the import. You can
find information on this in the section "Message log (Page 156)".

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 137
Functions
8.5 Export / Import

Additional information
● Section "Replacing devices (Page 121)"

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

138 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Functions
8.6 Diagnostics

8.6 Diagnostics

8.6.1 Field device diagnostics

Description
SIMATIC PDM provides a detailed diagnostics for integrated field devices.
The icons are assigned when the devices are configured. When a connection is established,
device-specific diagnostic information is automatically classified and indicated by the
corresponding icons. You will find information on the icons in the section "Overview of Device
Icons (Page 140)".
This diagnostic information is automatically saved in the project, even if the assigned
parameter data are not saved.
When an online connection is being established, an identification check is performed initially.
After this, the device status is determined, and the device is depicted with the corresponding
icon.

Note
It is possible to disable the diagnostics update.

Diagnostic information
The diagnostics provides the following categorized information:
● Communication
– Communication with the device was good
– Communication was good, but the device does not support further diagnostics
– Communication faulty
– Device assignment error
● Process
– Device unchecked
– Device deactivated
– Measured value alarm
– Measured value warning
– Measured value tolerance
● Maintenance
– Maintenance alarm
– Maintenance warning
– Maintenance required

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 139
Functions
8.6 Diagnostics

● Configuration
– Configuration error
– Configuration warning
– Configuration changed
● Operating mode
– Manual mode
– Simulation or substitute value
– Out of service

Device status

Note
When checking the status of a device, sometimes the diagnostic information cannot be fully
determined because not all devices support the full scope of this function.

Additional information
Section "Identity check (Page 143)"
Section "Updating diagnostics (Page 143)"

8.6.2 Overview of Device Icons

The following table explains the meaning of the possible icons for the devices configured in
SIMATIC PDM. The statuses of these icons may not be fully supported by all devices.
The corresponding icons are assigned to the devices during configuration.
The displayed icons are updated as follows:
● When a connection is established to field devices
● When a picture is changed
The diagnostic information is automatically saved in the project, even if the parameter data is
not saved.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

140 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Functions
8.6 Diagnostics

Display of the icons

The icons are displayed in the following views:
● In SIMATIC Manager
– Process device network view
– Process device plant view
● In SIMATIC PDM in the tree structure
● In the LifeList in the tree structure

Icons

Icon Description
Deactivated
No device description (EDD) from the device catalog has yet been assigned to the field device / Field device
cannot be accessed.
Not validated
A device description from the device catalog has been assigned to the field device.
Communication faulty
Communication error, communication has been interrupted or no communication could take place with the
device at the configured address. The device cannot provide detailed diagnostic information.
Assignment error
The field device is incompatible with the configured field device or the device has been configured incorrectly.
The device cannot provide detailed diagnostic information.
Maintenance alarm
Maintenance is required immediately as there is a device fault.
Maintenance demanded
Maintenance is required to prevent a possible device fault from occurring.
Additional diagnostic information is available.
Maintenance required
Maintenance must be scheduled.
No functional restriction has been diagnosed for the field device, service is requested.
Additional diagnostic information is available.
Manual mode
There is a communication connection with the field device. The device is in manual mode.
Simulation mode
There is a communication connection with the field device. The device is in manual mode.
For example, the device is in manual "simulation mode".
Out of service
There is a communication connection with the field device. The device is in manual mode.
For example, the device is in manual "Out of service" mode.
Configuration error
Field device fault due to a parameter/interconnection error or configuration error in the hardware compo‐
nents. A maintenance alarm is triggered automatically.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 141
Functions
8.6 Diagnostics

Icon Description
Configuration warning
Field device warning due to invalid parameters for which substitute values are used. A maintenance request
is triggered automatically.
Configuration changed
The parameters set for the device do not match the parameter data saved in the project. Communication
with the device is possible to carry out a value comparison or to change parameter settings.
Unknown diagnostics status
Unknown field device status due to invalid parameters for which substitute values are used. A maintenance
request is triggered automatically.
Process value alarm
At least one process value has exceeded or fallen below a hardware interrupt limit whose parameters were
assigned in the device. Communication with the device is possible.
Process value warning
At least one process value has exceeded or fallen below a process warning limit whose parameters were
assigned in the device. Communication with the device is possible.
Process value tolerance
At least one process value has exceeded or fallen below a process tolerance limit parameter set in the
device. Communication with the device is possible.
No messages
No functional restrictions or diagnostic information known.
No diagnostic check
No functional restrictions known. The field device does not support additional diagnostic information.
Test mode (background color of diagnostics icon)
The device is in local test mode. All the displayed information or diagnostics may be simulated. The infor‐
mation transferred to the automation systems (measured values and status) may also be simulated.

Icons for FF device blocks

The icons for FF device blocks are based on the device icons.

Icon Description
FF block icon

The block icon is a device icon expanded by the block character. It has an equivalent meaning.
Example:
FF block not functional (Out of service)

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

142 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Functions
8.6 Diagnostics

8.6.3 Connection diagnostics

Description
When you establish an online connection to a device in SIMATIC PDM, the following points
are checked while the connection is being established:
● Device type
● Device (TAG)
● Changes made to the device that have not yet been saved in the project
If a connection is aborted, SIMATIC PDM automatically attempts to establish a new connection.
Any errors that occur are displayed and logged.
If a device has not accepted the data in an identical manner, the values that are written to the
device and the actual values read back from the device can be displayed.
You can then decide whether or not to use the changed values in your project.

Additional information
● Section "Overview of Device Icons (Page 140)"
● Section "Communication Problems (Page 291)"

8.6.4 Identity check

The identification check verifies consistency between the connected and the configured
device. The scope of the identification check depends on information from the device
description of the respective device.
Once the identification check is complete, the device status is determined and a corresponding
icon is assigned to the device.
If the identification check determines a difference between the connected device and the
configured device, an informational dialog is displayed with information about the connected
device and the configured device.

8.6.5 Updating diagnostics

If online communication with the currently selected object is established, SIMATIC PDM is able
to carry out a device diagnostic of the field devices.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 143
Functions
8.6 Diagnostics

Enabling device diagnostics

1. Select the Options > SIMATIC PDM > Settings menu command in SIMATIC Manager.
The "Settings" dialog opens.
2. Select the "Communication" tab.
3. Activate the "Diagnosis Update" check box in the "Device diagnostics" area.

See also
"Communication" tab (Page 259)
"Update diagnostics - ..." dialog box (Page 219)
Overview of Device Icons (Page 140)

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

144 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Functions
8.7 LifeList

8.7 LifeList

8.7.1 Working with the LifeList

Introduction

LifeList makes it possible to identify active field devices without configuration. With LifeList ,
you perform a scan on one of the following PDM objects:
● PROFIBUS DP network
● PROFIBUS PA network
● HART modem network
● Foundation Fieldbus network

Note
Scanning a network
The selected network is analyzed during a scan with LifeList . A separate scan is required for
subordinate networks.

Starting LifeList
If the project is opened in SIMATIC Manager, you can start LifeList from the following views:
● Starting from HW Config
– Select a PDM object containing the field devices.
– Select the shortcut menu command SIMATIC PDM > Start LifeList .
SIMATIC PDM starts. LifeList is opened.
● Starting from the process device network view
– Select a PDM object containing the field devices.
– Select the menu command Edit > SIMATIC PDM > Start LifeList .
● Starting from SIMATIC PDM
– Requirement: A PDM object containing the field devices is selected.
– To open the LifeList , select the menu command View > Start LifeList .

Stopping LifeList
When the LifeList is open, click "Close".

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 145
Functions
8.7 LifeList

Setting the address range for scan operation

When the LifeList is opened, the scan range is set to the complete address range according
to the protocol of the network on which the LifeList was started.

PROFIBUS Address 0 to 126

FF Address 20 to 251 (minimum value 16, default val‐
ue 20)
HART modem Address 0 to 63

Recommendation:
Limit the address range for the scan operation.
A scan operation across a large address range takes longer.
The address range is set via the toolbar or via the "Settings" dialog in the "Options" menu.
This setting cannot be stored centrally since it is network-specific. The setting must be made
again each time the LifeList is opened.

Scan without diagnostics

The "Start Scan" function is used to start a new scan operation.
Any previous scan result is deleted.
During the first phase of the scan operation, the list of assigned communication addresses is
determined based on the selected address range.
For each assigned address, the scan table contains an object whose icon is initially determined
by whether or not the object is a (bus) master.

Icon Meaning
Network

(Bus) "master" device

"Local master" device (own PC)

Device without EDD assignment

Communication error

Device with EDD assignment

Device after diagnostics run (result: Good)

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

146 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Functions
8.7 LifeList

Icon Meaning
Device after diagnostics run (result: no diagnostic support)

Additional icon meanings can be found in Overview of Device Icons (Page 140)

Note
The first phase of the scan operation cannot be interrupted.

During the second phase of the scan operation, identification data is called and entered in the
scan table for each address at which no (bus) master was detected.
For PROFIBUS devices, information is also read from the GSD file and entered in the table,
e.g., the device family.

Note
The second phase of the scan operation can be interrupted. The current object will still be
completed.

Depending on available licenses (Page 149), automatic EDD assignment also occurs in this
phase.
When identification data is successfully called, it is entered in the table and an attempt is made
to make an EDD assignment with this information:
● If the EDD assignment is successful, the object is marked with a blue device icon .
● If the associated EDD cannot be explicitly determined, no assignment is made and the
object retains its gray device icon from the first phase.
● If communication problems occur, the object receives the corresponding icon .

Scan with diagnostics

The "Start scan with diagnostics" function is used to start a new scan operation with
diagnostics.
Any previous scan result is deleted.
The first two phases are the same as for the scan without diagnostics.
In the third phase, the diagnostic function is executed for the objects with EDD assignment
and the result is entered in the table.
The diagnostic icon appears and the message text is entered in the "Device status" column.

Note
The third phase of the scan operation can be interrupted. The current object will still be
completed.

This function is available only when the appropriate licenses (Page 149) are installed.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 147
Functions
8.7 LifeList

Scan result
The devices found appear in the tree view with their object name (TAG).
Other information determined is displayed in additional columns.
The additional information that is displayed depends on the type of network on which the
LifeList was started.

Column header PROFIBUS FF HART modem

Available nodes + + +
Address + + +
Manufacturer + + +
Device type + + +
Device ID + + +
Hardware revision + + +
Software revision + + +
Installation date + + +
Ident number + - -
Device family + - -
Profile revision + - +
GSD file + - -
Long address - - +
Device status + + +

Update diagnostics
The "Update diagnostics" function is used to once again determine the diagnostic information
for the object selected in the scan table.
This function is available only when the appropriate licenses (Page 149) are installed.

Assign address and TAG

If you want to assign a new address or object name to a device, select the "Assign address
and TAG" function for the selected object.
The "Assign address and TAG..." (Page 152) dialog opens.
Here, you can enter a new object name and a new address and then transfer them directly to
the connected device using the "Transfer" button.

Device Selection (Reassign)

If there has not been an automatic EDD assignment of objects, you have the option of making
the assignment manually.
Manual assignment is appropriate for objects for which you want to start diagnostics or export
the results.
Manual EDD assignment uses the "Device Selection (Reassign)". function.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

148 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Functions
8.7 LifeList

This function is only available when the appropriate licenses (Page 149) are installed.

Object properties
If you start the "Properties" function from the LifeList, the "Object Properties (Page 248)" dialog
appears, but without the "Communication" and "Document Manager" tabs.
● "General" tab (Page 195)
● "Device" tab (Page 196)
● "Diagnostics" tab (Page 196)

Note
If the "Object Properties" dialog is started from the LifeList, the "Communication" and
"Document Manager" tabs are not displayed and the "Update Diagnostics" button is not visible
in the "Diagnostics" tab.

LifeList via Ethernet routing

The following requirements have to be met to apply the LifeList to objects via Ethernet routing:
● An S7 hardware project can communicate with the automation system via HW Config.
● The hardware project has been downloaded to the automation system along with the
corresponding PROFIBUS-Link .
If these conditions are met, communication can be established via Ethernet routing with
networks of the following types:
● PROFIBUS DP network
● PROFIBUS PA network
● FONDATION Fieldbus via FF Link at PROFIBUS DP
You can find information on the required hardware in the file PDM-readme.

8.7.2 Licensing
The functional scope of the LifeList is determined by the installed licenses as follows:

Function Single Point Basic Extended

Set address range for scan + + +
Automatic EDD assignment - + +
File Export - - +

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 149
Functions
8.7 LifeList

Function Single Point Basic Extended

Edit Start 'Scan' + + +
Start 'Scan with di‐ - - +
agnostics'
Start 'Update diag‐ - - +
nostics'
Device Update diagnostics - - +
Assign address + + +
and TAG
Device Selection - + +
(Reassign)
Properties + + +

8.7.3 Menus and dialog boxes

8.7.3.1 "File" menu

Export
Exports the determined network, including all of its devices.
The devices identified as bus master objects (e.g. PCs) are not exported.
The "Export" function is used to open the "Export - ..." dialog box (Page 176).

Note
If the "Export" dialog is started from the LifeList, the "Document Manager" check box is cleared.

A structure export file is generated during the export from the LifeList.
The parameter export files can only be generated for objects with EDD assignment.

Note
Access to SIMATIC PDM via SIMATIC PDM Server
Export from the LifeList is not available in the browser view of SIMATIC PDM.

Close
Closes the change log or LifeList.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

150 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Functions
8.7 LifeList

8.7.3.2 "Edit" menu

Start "Scan"
Starts a scan operation.
The accessible devices of the network on which the LifeList was started are determined.
Any previous scan result is deleted.
Automatic EDD assignment then takes place, depending on available licenses.

Start "Scan with diagnostics"

Starts a scan operation.
The accessible devices of the network on which the LifeList was started are determined.
Any previous scan result is deleted.
Automatic EDD assignment then takes place, depending on available licenses.
A diagnostics run is started at the conclusion of the automatic EDD assignment.
This determines the diagnostic status of all objects with EDD assignment.

Stop
The current scan operation is stopped.
This function can only be selected if an action is being executed.
You can determine whether an action is being executed from the active progress display.

Start "Update diagnostics"

The diagnostics run is started for the current scan result without starting a new scan operation.

8.7.3.3 "Device" menu

Update diagnostics
The diagnostic information is re-determined for the object selected in the scan table.
The icons are updated and the message text is entered in the table.
This function can only be called automatically or manually for objects with EDD assignment.

Assign address and TAG

The "LifeList - Assign Address and TAG" dialog opens.
This dialog can be used to assign a new address and a new object name to the selected object.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 151
Functions
8.7 LifeList

"LifeList - Assign address and TAG..." dialog

When the LifeList has been determined, you can perform the following for the device displayed
in the "Online" area in the "LifeList - Assign address and tag..." dialog box:
● Change object name
● Change address
● Change object name and address

Buttons

Button Function
Select object Select this button in the following cases:
● You want to assign an existing device configuration to a replacement
device with default address.
● You want to assign an existing device configuration to an unspecified
device.
Transfer You can only select this button if changes were made in at least one text
box and both text boxes were selected.
The information in both boxes is identical if the operation was successfully
completed (status \"Transfer successful\").
Reset address ● The "Reset address" button is only available for FF devices.
(only available for FF de‐ ● The function "moves" the device to the area for temporary FF devices
vices) (reserved address range for FF devices - addresses 248 to 251). The
name (TAG) remains unchanged.
● You can verify execution with LifeList .

Note
Address or name (TAG) occupied
If the address or name (TAG) is occupied, then the action will not be performed. A
corresponding message will be displayed.

Device information
In this area, the following data is displayed for the detected device (online) and for the new
settings:
● Manufacturer
● Device type
● Device revision

See also
"Assign address and TAG..." dialog box (Page 191)

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

152 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Functions
8.7 LifeList

Device Selection (Reassign)

This function is used to manually assign a device type and thus an EDD for the selected object.

See also
Creating your own device library using the project filter (Page 53)
Creating your own device library from a collection of device descriptions (Page 54)

Properties
Opens the dialog window containing the properties of the selected object.

See also
Working with the LifeList (Page 145)

8.7.3.4 "View" menu

Messages...
Opens the "Messages" dialog box.

Additional information
Section "Message log (Page 156)"

8.7.3.5 "Options" menu

Settings
Opens the dialog window for setting the address range.
This setting cannot be stored centrally since it is network-specific.
The setting must be made again each time the LifeList is opened.

8.7.3.6 "Help" menu

Help
Displays the help on SIMATIC PDM LifeList.
You can navigate to different help topics from the Table of Contents. The "Index" and "Find"
functions enable you to display information on specific terms.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 153
Functions
8.7 LifeList

About...
This menu command displays information about the version and the copyright.

8.7.4 Menu bar

Structure
Below, you will find an overview of the LifeList menus.

Menu Submenu
File ● Export (Page 150)
● Close (Page 150)
Edit ● Start "Scan" (Page 151)
● Start "Scan with diagnostics" (Page 151)
● Stop (Page 151)
● Start "Update diagnostics" (Page 151)
Device ● Update diagnostics (Page 151)
● Assign address and TAG (Page 151)
● Device Selection (Reassign) (Page 153)
● Properties (Page 153)
View ● Messages... (Page 153)
Options ● Settings (Page 153)
Help ● Help (Page 153)
● About... (Page 154)

8.7.5 Toolbar
The toolbar is located below the menu bar and contains several buttons. You can use the
buttons to execute frequently used menu commands without having to open the menu.

Icons
Meanings of the icons used:

Icon Menu com‐ Description

mand
Start "Scan A scan operation is started.
with diagnos‐ A diagnostics run is started at the conclusion of the automatic EDD
tics" assignment.
(Page 151)
Start "Scan" A scan operation is started.
(Page 151)

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

154 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Functions
8.7 LifeList

Icon Menu com‐ Description

mand
Stop The current action (scan or diagnostics) is stopped.
(Page 151)
Start "Update At the current scan result, a diagnostics run is started without starting
diagnostics" a new scan
(Page 151)
Min. address - Start of range for scan operation
Max. address - End of range for scan operation
Export The determined network, including all of its devices, is exported.
(Page 150)
Settings The "Settings" dialog box opens.
(Page 153) You can adapt the LifeList according to your requirements and pref‐
erences in this dialog box.
Messages... The "Messages" dialog box opens.
(Page 153)
Help The help on SIMATIC PDM LifeList opens.
(Page 153)

8.7.6 Status bar

Information about current actions is displayed in the status bar.
The active progress display on the right is shown when an action is currently active.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 155
Functions
8.8 Logs

8.8 Logs

8.8.1 Message log

Information about events in SIMATIC PDM is displayed in the message log.

Events in the message log

The message log contains information on the following events:
● Events in online dialogs
● Events when executing "Upload to PG/PC..." and "Download to device..."
● Events when executing "Update diagnostics"
● Events when executing the LifeList
● Events when executing Export and Import
● Events in Device Integration Manager
Note
Device-specific log functions
The device description is used to determine the events to be reported and the log entries
to be displayed in the message log.

Message log
The message log contains the following columns:
● Index
● Date and time
Displays the date and time in UTC format, including the local time difference.
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss +/-HH:mm
● Message class
● Context
● Message

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

156 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Functions
8.8 Logs

Filtering the message log

You can filter the events shown in the message log according to the following categories.
Select one of the following settings from the drop-down list:
● Without filter
All information is shown.
● Errors only
Only errors are shown.
● Errors and warnings only
Only warnings and errors are shown.

File saving and formats

You can save the message log in CSV format (*.csv).

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 157
Functions
8.9 Graphical displays

8.9 Graphical displays

Note
Functions for the graphical display of values are available in SIMATIC PDM, if they are provided
by the manufacturer of the device description.

Chart dialog window

When working with field devices, please note that:
● The following cannot be changed:
– The contents of the chart dialog window
– Process values
● If the device description can be edited, you can use SIMATIC PDM to change the following
data in the chart dialog window:
– Variables
– Constants

Functions and possible representation

The following functions can be displayed by SIMATIC PDM:
● Monitoring process values
● Monitoring measuring signal raw values
● Monitoring status or wear values inside the device
● X-Y trends, e.g. envelope trends for radar level gauges
● Trends (for multiple process variables, measured values)
● Calibration functions
● Zero point settings
● Min/max pointer
● Diagnostic states
● Restore factory settings
● Mode changes
● Online parameter assignment
● Simulation of process variables, statuses, and diagnostics messages
● Classification of device-specific diagnoses

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

158 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Functions
8.9 Graphical displays

Additional information
● IEC 61804-2
● IEC 61804-3

8.9.1 Graphical display of values

Online functions
The following is defined in the device description with regard to online functions:
● Process variables and measured values that can be visualized or used online
● Type of display and content of the online dialogs
● Possible online operations
The values and parameters appear on standardized online displays, which are coordinated
with different functions.

Note
Online functions are active (orange bar)
When a function accesses online values, an animated orange bar is shown in the dialog boxes
at the top dialog margin.
The animation is constant for values that are updated cyclically and sporadic for values that
are not updated cyclically.

Displaying information in the chart

Device description files can include the following information on displaying values/parameters
in charts:
● Source of values/parameters
● Chart type
● Value ranges

Charts for process values

● Trend chart (Page 160)
Multiple values/parameters can be displayed in a chart at the same time.
– Y-T charts
● Tachometer chart (Page 163)
Each value/parameter is displayed in a separate chart.
● Bar chart (Page 217)
Multiple values/parameters can be displayed simultaneously in a chart.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 159
Functions
8.9 Graphical displays

Trend chart for variables and constants

Multiple variables/constants can be displayed in a chart at one time.
● Trend chart (Page 160)
Multiple variables/constants can be displayed in a chart at one time.
– Y-T charts
– X-Y charts
The following data is displayed:
● Online values
● Data from files
● Data read from the device

Trend chart for digital values

Digital values can be shown in a trend chart.
The representation of the values depends on the device description.

Additional information
● Section "Charts and trends (depends on device) (Page 216)"
● Section "Displaying process variables and measured values (Page 217)"
● IEC 61804-2
● IEC 61804-3

8.9.2 Trend chart

The following may be displayed in the trend charts:
● Display of several trends
● Display of one x axis and several y axes
● Display of one y axis with several trends
The way in which trends are displayed is derived from the device description:
● Trend colors
● Visual highlighting of individual trends (e.g. line width)

y-t chart
In y-t charts, the trends are updated incrementally.
The following display modes are usually used:
● Automatic scrolling along the time axis.
● If the trends have reached the right-hand margin, they continue to be recorded starting from
the left again, and the old trends are overwritten one after the other.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

160 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Functions
8.9 Graphical displays

● If the trends have reached the right-hand margin, the trend display is cleared and the trends
start again from the left.
● The time interval is not updated.

x-y chart
The way in which information is displayed with x-y charts depends on the specifications in the
device description. The following displays are typical:
● Representation of static trends
● Representation of parameters that change at certain events

Display mode
The trend display mode can be selected in the trend charts by using the toolbar that is available
in the "Display mode" drop-down list.
In the x-y diagram, this option is not available and the "Static" option is automatically selected.

Modes:
● Strip
– The most recent value is always shown on the far right of the chart.
– The user can change the length of the time interval.
● Scope
– The time axis shows a defined time interval.
– The first value for the current time interval is always shown on the left-hand side of the
chart. The subsequent values are always assigned to a time that falls within the time
interval shown. The final value for the time interval that is being displayed is always
shown on the right-hand side of the chart.
– As soon as a time interval expires, the displayed values are deleted.
– The first value for the subsequent time interval is always shown on the left-hand side of
the chart.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 161
Functions
8.9 Graphical displays

● Sweep
– The time axis shows a defined time interval.
– The first value for the current time interval is always shown on the left-hand side of the
chart. The subsequent values are always assigned to a time that falls within the time
interval shown. The final value for the time interval that is being displayed is always
shown on the right-hand side of the chart.
– The values that are displayed in the chart get overwritten by the values for the
subsequent time interval.
● Static
– The time interval is not updated.
– The user can change the displayed range however he or she likes.
– Recommendation:
Use this display mode to display static values.

8.9.3 Bar chart

Note
Functions for the display of process variables and measured values are available in SIMATIC
PDM, if they are provided by the manufacturer of the device description.

Process variables and measured values are displayed in bar charts. A bar chart always shows
current values.
The following may be displayed in the bar charts:
● Name of the chart
● Names of the variables
● Limit (for the warning range)
Note
The value range of the axis can be moved with the mouse.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

162 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Functions
8.9 Graphical displays

Example
The figure below shows an example of a dialog window with a bar chart.

+LJKHUOHYHOGHVLJQDWLRQ

7$*

'HVFULSWLRQ &XUUHQWYDOXH

0.000 5.000

3DUDPHWHU 
3DUDPHWHU 

1,5 /LPLW

Additional information
● Section "Trend chart (Page 160)"
● Section "Tachometer chart (Page 163)"
● Section "Icons and buttons (Page 164)"
● Section "Work with trends (Page 167)"
● Section "Editing trends (Page 168)"

8.9.4 Tachometer chart

In SIMATIC PDM, only one value is displayed in a tachometer chart.
Limits can be assigned to the displayed value. These are highlighted in color in the chart.

Chart
The chart can show the following elements:
● Name of the chart
● Inscription for the tachometer
● Name of the variable
● Min/max pointer (marks the maximum or minimum value reached since the start of
monitoring)
● Warning ranges (represented by hatching)
● Limit (for a warning range)
● Current value (represented as a needle on the tachometer and as a numeric value below
the tachometer)

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 163
Functions
8.9 Graphical displays

● Inscription of the axis

● Unit

Example
The figure below shows an example of a dialog window with a tachometer chart.

3ODQWGHVLJQDWLRQ

7$*
'HVFULSWLRQ
3DUDPHWHU

  
 
 
 
/LPLW /LPLW
 
 
 
 
0LQPD[SRLQWHU  
 

0HDVXUHGYDOXHW\SH

8QLW

8.9.5 Icons and buttons

Icons and buttons on the toolbar

Icon Description
Zoom in horizontally
Use the "Zoom in" button to enlarge the trend area.
Zoom out horizontally
Use the "Zoom out" button to make the trend area smaller.
Zoom in vertically
Use the "Zoom in" button to enlarge the trend area.
Zoom out vertically
Use the "Zoom out" button to make the trend area smaller.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

164 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Functions
8.9 Graphical displays

Icon Description
"Display mode (Page 160)" - Allows you to set the trend display mode
● Strip
● Scope
● Sweep
● Static
Trend Manager - Allows you to make settings for the trends and markers shown
● You can use the check box in the "Trend Manager" drop-down list to hide/show trends. In the legend,
hidden trends are grayed out.
● Each trend is automatically assigned a marker (trend symbol) with its own color and appearance.
You can use the check box to hide/show the marker.
● An editable trend is always selected via the Trend Manager.
Export
Trends can be exported in .csv file format. You must first select the trend to be exported in the Trend
Manager.
Import
Once a trend has been exported, the resulting .csv file can be imported.
Imported trends are shown with their own x and y axes. To allow an imported trend to be compared
with recordings that are currently in progress, the X axis of the imported trend can be linked to an existing
axis.
Link axis
Once a trend has been imported, the new X axis (axis B) for the imported trend can be linked to the
existing X axis (axis A). Axis B is then synchronized with axis A to run simultaneously, but it can be
adjusted without affecting axis A. This makes it possible to compare trends that were recorded and
displayed previously with the current trend.
"View" drop-down "View" drop-down list - for displaying/hiding elements in the user interface
list ● Legend
● Ruler
● Table (values tables)
● Marker (symbol assigned to a trend)
Print
There is a Print dialog that allows you to print out the current trends. You can enter a comment for the
printout.

Icons, buttons, and information displayed in the trend chart

Icon Description
Open padlock
You can change the value.
The value represents a limit for the values that are displayed on the relevant axis.
Closed padlock
You cannot change the value.
The value represents a limit for the values that are displayed on the relevant axis.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 165
Functions
8.9 Graphical displays

Icon Description
Legend Each trend is identified by means of its name and a symbol with the same color as the line. The legend
displays the following information consecutively for the trends shown in the chart
(format: Symbol Name Date:Time: Value):
● Trend symbol
● Trend name
● Date:Time (format: DD:MM:YYYY hh:mm:ss.sss
● Value
– Value currently being read in (measuring lines not activated)
– Cursor points to a measuring line (active measuring line): Value at the intersection of the trend and
measuring line (the values at the intersection point are underlined)
Measuring line Measuring lines
White Active SIMATIC PDM makes a measuring line available in trend charts. The measuring line symbol identifies the
Or‐ Pas‐ current position of the measuring line.
ange sive ● Legend for measuring line
– The value at the intersection of the trend and measuring line is shown at the intersection
– Active values are underlined
– Interpolated values are not underlined
● Using the measuring line
– Pull the measuring line to the required position
– Removes a measuring line (park position).
– Remove measuring line (Alt-Click)
– Duplicate measuring line (Ctrl-Click)
Shaded trend Cause: Data reduction
The trend includes a large number of data points within the displayed range. The individual values cannot
be displayed.
Dotted trends There are no measured values in a range.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

166 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Functions
8.9 Graphical displays

8.9.6 Work with trends

Interaction
The following functions are available in dialog boxes with trends:
● Adjust display range
You can increase or decrease the range of a trend shown in the chart to meet your needs.
– Select a range
Select the starting point with the mouse and, keeping the left mouse button pressed,
select the end point of the range to be displayed. Display is stopped and the desired
range is shown.
– Display minimum and maximum of all trends
Double-click the Y axis. The minimum and maximum of the Y axis are set in such a way
that the values of all trends associated with this Y axis are completely visible in the
interval displayed on the X axis.
– Display the entire time range
Double-click the X axis. The X axis is set in such a way that all trends are included, from
the first to last point.
– Adjust the left display range
You can stretch or compress the corresponding axis by holding down the left mouse
button. The right or upper scale value remains unchanged in this case.
– Adjust the right display range
You can stretch or compress the corresponding axis by holding down the right mouse
button. The left or lower scale value remains unchanged.
– Move the display range
You can move the corresponding axis range by keeping the center mouse button
pressed.
● Capture trend
You can capture all trend areas.
Double-click in the trend area. The values for all trends are displayed in the selected area
(currently selected time range / X axis).
● Move the ruler
You can move the ruler.
Select the ruler with the mouse and move it by keeping the left mouse button pressed. The
changing x-position is displayed in the bottom right of the chart. Moving the "handles" is
depicted as a numeric value. Once the left mouse button is released, the Y value associated
with the X position is displayed.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 167
Functions
8.9 Graphical displays

● Move axis
You can move an axis.
Hold down the "Ctrl" key. Click on an axis in the chart and move it via drag-and-drop.
The grid within the chart is based on the scale shown to the left of the chart.
● Link axes
This function is used for comparing trend values.
Requirement: A file containing exported trend values is available.
– Select the "Static" entry from the "Display mode" drop-down list.
The time axis is stopped.
– Import the values for a trend.
– Align both axes of the displayed and imported trends in order to match up suitable points
of reference. To do this, use the "Move axis" function and adapt the display range of the
axes.
– Click the "Link axes" button on the toolbar.
– Select the "Strip" entry from the "Display mode" drop-down list.
The axes now move simultaneously and you can compare the values. Changing the
leading axis affects the following axis, but not vice versa.
● Display help
– Device-specific help on trends can be integrated in the device description. You can open
this help by clicking the "Help" button.
– Any existing tooltip help for an object is displayed when you hover the mouse pointer
over an object.
● Print functions
● Export and import function
– You must first select the trend to be exported (as well as a trend that is to be edited) in
the Trend Manager.

8.9.7 Editing trends

The manufacturer of a device determines which values/parameters can be visualized and
used. The device description is used to specify how SIMATIC PDM shows data that is to be
displayed in charts. You can only edit data (variables and constants) in charts with SIMATIC
PDM if this is permitted by the device description. Before you can edit a trend, it must be
selected in the Trend Manager.

Editing in the Trend Manager

Once you have selected the trend in the Trend Manager, the following is displayed for the
editable trend:
● Black trend points
Trend points that can be edited

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

168 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Functions
8.9 Graphical displays

Note
You can only edit trend points if the respective function is allowed by the device description.

● Adding trend points

Hold down the "Ctrl" key. Click the drawing area in the chart.
– If the point you have clicked in the chart features on the trend line, the new point is
inserted into the trend between two existing points.
– If the point you have clicked in the chart falls outside the trend line, the new point is
added at the end of the trend.
● Deleting trend points
– Press and hold down the "Alt" key. Click a trend point in the chart. The trend point is
deleted.
– Once a trend point has been selected, you can delete it by pressing the "Del" key.
– For multiple trend points:
Press "Ctrl" + "Alt" and click on the trend points to be deleted.
● Moving trend points
Hold down the "Ctrl" key. Click on a trend point in the chart and move it via drag-and-drop.
Note
The grid and other trend points have a magnetic effect on the point to be moved.

● Selecting multiple trend points

The trend points are captured by using a selection rectangle.
Click with the left mouse button to select the starting point for your rectangle. Then drag
the cursor across the chart while keeping the mouse button pressed. All the trend points
that fall within this rectangle are marked with a red dot.
● Define the zoom area
The zoom area is captured using a selection rectangle.
Click with the left mouse button to select the starting point for your rectangle. Then drag
the cursor across the chart while keeping the mouse button and SHIFT key pressed. The
area inside the rectangle is part of the zoom area.
● "Monotonic entry" check box
To enter monotonic data values, activate the "Monotonic entry" check box. The arrow
indicates the direction (monotonically ascending or monotonically descending).

Additional information
● Section "Icons and buttons (Page 164)"

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 169
Functions
8.10 Asset management

8.10 Asset management

8.10.1 Asset management

Asset management covers all activities and measures which help to preserve or increase the
value of a plant. As well as production management, process control, and process optimization,
above all this includes maintenance work designed to preserve and increase a system's value,
known as "plant-level asset management".

Asset management with SIMATIC PDM

SIMATIC PDM supports you in performing plant-level asset management with functions for
configuring, assigning parameters for, commissioning, diagnosing, and maintaining intelligent
field devices and components.

Asset management functions of SIMATIC PDM

SIMATIC PDM can supply extended information for the Asset Management for devices that
are described by a device description (EDD/DD), for example:
● Detailed diagnostic information (manufacturer information, information on fault diagnostics
and troubleshooting, further documentation)
● Change information (audit trail log)
● Parameter information
● Diagnostic and status information for all devices is labeled and displayed with standardized
symbols.
You can find information on this in section "Overview of Device Icons (Page 140)".
● Data is sent to an asset management system (e.g. PCS 7 maintenance station) upon
request from the system.
● Export interface
You can find information on this in section "Exporting (Page 175)".
● Device-specific information and profile information is displayed in multiple languages,
provided that such information can be extracted from the device description files.

NOTICE
Limited functionality
For use of the HART Server functionality, you must be logged onto the SIMATIC PDM Server
locally.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

170 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Functions
8.10 Asset management

8.10.2 Use with the PCS 7 Maintenance Station

Maintenance Station Standard and Maintenance Station Basic

Process control of a maintenance station is started in the same way as the process control of
an Operator Station.
When using an MS multi-user system and SIMATIC PDM, the Engineering Station must be
switched on and the PDM Server manager started so that PDM device data is delivered.

Note
When PDM is integrated in PCS 7 and Asset Management is used, we recommend that you
do not activate the function "Transfer maintenance alarm to MS station". Alarms that are only
recorded by PDM and not transferred via the status of the process value could lead to the
failure of process tags. However, if you wish to actively monitor HART field devices and also
record diagnostic events that are not shown in the HART status, this function must be activated.

SIMATIC PDM Maintenance Station

Before activating process control, check the setting for the WinCC project type in WinCC
Explorer. A single-user station project must be set as the project type.
Activate process control in WinCC Explorer using the "Activate" icon.

Activate SIMATIC PDM ASSET Service

You can display the diagnostics of field devices in faceplates with SIMATIC PCS 7 and
SIMATIC PDM. Assign the current diagnostics project in SIMATIC PDM to be able to use the
diagnostics function of SIMATIC PDM.

Requirements
● The Windows user using the ASSET must be a member of the "SIMATIC HMI" Windows
group.
● Configuration of the PCS 7 multiproject/project is complete.
● SIMATIC PDM is installed on ES.
● Field device parameter assignment is complete.
● A PDM application is inserted into the PC station of the engineering station.

Procedure
1. Select the PCS 7 multiproject/project in the component view of SIMATIC Manager.
2. Select the menu command Options > SIMATIC PDM > Settings... .
3. Select the "Maintenance" tab.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 171
Functions
8.10 Asset management

4. Check the configured path.

If the configured path is not the desired path, select the path using the "Assign current
project" button.
5. Click "OK".

Start SIMATIC PDM ASSET Service

Note
Note that you must manually restart the SIMATIC PDM ASSET Service in the SIMATIC PDM
ASSET Service Manager on the engineering station once in order to receive data from PDM.

1. Click the following icon in the information area of the task bar of the operating system:
Start/stop the SIMATIC PDM ASSET Service.
The "SIMATIC PDM Asset Service Manager" dialog box opens.
"Stop" button
When you click this button, the SIMATIC PDM Asset Service stops.

"Start" button
When you click this button, the SIMATIC PDM Asset Service starts.

"Allow automatic start/stop" check box

If this check box is selected, the Asset Service can be started and stopped by other components
(e.g. WinCC RTO, SAM, project archiving).
During archiving, the Asset Service is stopped and given a "lock flag" so that other components
cannot start the Asset Service and thereby interrupt the archiving.
● If the Asset Service was activated prior to the archiving, it is started again automatically
once archiving is finished and the "lock flag" is removed.
Start and stop commands of the Asset Service Manager always have higher priority, for
example, they can start the Asset Service during ongoing archiving.
● If this check box is not selected, the Asset Service can only be started and stopped by the
Asset Service Manager. The following applies then:
– If the Asset Service is started, archiving will fail.
– If the Asset Service is stopped, all faceplate queries via SAM are rejected with an error.

Editing several PCS 7 projects with PDM

If you edit several projects in SIMATIC Manager with a PDM computer, you have to observe
the following sequence when you change between projects:
1. Stop the SIMATIC PDM ASSET Service on the PDM computer.
2. Stop the process mode on the maintenance station of the current project.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

172 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Functions
8.10 Asset management

3. Open the required project in SIMATIC Manager.

4. Set the maintenance project in the SIMATIC Manager.
5. Start the SIMATIC PDM ASSET Service on the PDM computer.
6. Start the process mode on the maintenance station of the current project.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 173
Functions
8.10 Asset management

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

174 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM 9
9.1 "File" menu
The menus and dialog boxes can contain other device-specific menu commands.
If a device is opened twice, for example, by opening the higher-level network and by opening
it directly, device-specific functions are grayed out in the second window and can only be
accessed in the window that was opened first.

Note
Device-specific menu items and help for these menu items are derived from the device
description assigned to the object. You will find device-specific information in the online help
and in the documentation provided by the device manufacturer. The PDF file associated with
this documentation does not contain any device-specific information.

9.1.1 Save
This menu command is used to save the current parameter settings from the parameter table
in the project (Offline data storage) on hard disk.
If a device is opened twice, for example, by opening the higher-level network and by opening
it directly, this menu item is grayed out in the second window and can only be accessed in the
window that was opened first.

9.1.2 Exporting

This menu command starts the export of device data of a PDM object to an XML file.
Make the settings for the export of device data in the "Export - <object name>" dialog.
If a device is opened twice, for example, by opening the higher-level network and by opening
it directly, this menu command is grayed out in the second window and can only be accessed
in the window that was opened first.

See also
"Export - ..." dialog box (Page 176)

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 175
Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM
9.1 "File" menu

9.1.2.1 "Export - ..." dialog box

Use the "Export - <Object name>" dialog box to make the settings for exporting device data
and start the export function.

Selecting the export path and transformation file

● Export path
Enter the path for storing the generated XML files in the input box. The name of each
exported XML file is structured as follows:
– Parameter export
Param$<plant-specific device name>$<date(YYYYMMDD_hhmmss)>.xml
– Structure export
Struct$<plant-specific device name>$<date(YYYYMMDD_hhmmss)>.xml

Note
The parameter export files are identified with the described prefix only in PDM V8.0.2 and
higher.

● HTML transformation file

– XSL file that contains the information for display in HTML format.
– In this input box, you can specify a file containing reference data for the appearance of
the export file (XML format). To create plant-specific HTML transformation files, use the
default file as your starting point.

Selecting data for export

The following information can be included in the parameter export:
● Device parameters
Device parameters of the devices selected before export.
● Diagnostics
Table listing diagnostic parameters plus the associated diagnostic text.
● Document Manager
Table listing the names of the documents that have been assigned to a device.
If all three check boxes are cleared, only the structure export file is created. A folder containing
parameter export files is not created.
The structure export file contains information on the object topology with all details required to
generate the exported object structure again or to correspondingly expand an existing object
structure.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

176 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM
9.1 "File" menu

Export file
To export, select the following categories for the export, which are listed in different sections
in the export file:

Category Description
<Device> Contains information about the device
<Id> The PDM-internal object ID of the device.
<Type> The PDM-internal object type of the device.
<Class> The PDM-internal object class of the device.
<ObjectPath> The placement of the device in the communication path.
<OnlineValues> Specifies whether an online export is present.
<CatalogPath> The placement of the device in the EDD catalog.
<ObjectName> The object name of the device.
<Section> The PDM-internal classification of the device.
<DeviceParame‐ Contains the parameters of the device.
ters>
<Documents> Attributes of the document manager
<Diagnostics> Attributes of device diagnostics

An individual attribute contains the following elements:

Attribute Description
Name Name of the attribute
Type Data type of the attribute
Label Identifier of the attribute
ParamViewMem‐ Specifies whether the attribute is visible in the parameter view of PDM.
ber
DisplayValue The value of the attribute that is used for the display.
Import Specifies whether the attribute is taken into account during the import.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 177
Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM
9.1 "File" menu

Attribute Description
State Status of the attribute Bit array whose value is formed from the following decimal
values:
● 0: OK
● 1: Invalid value
● 2: Reserved by the system
● 4: Reserved by the system
● 8: Changed by the user
● 16: Changed by the communication
● 32: Initial value
● 64: Readable values only
● 128: General error
● 256: Unit conversion failed
● 512: Values could not be updated by the communication
● 1024: Value could not be transferred to the device
● 2048: Reserved by the system
● 4096: Reserved by the system
Unit Unit of the attribute

"Select" area - Selecting an object

If the object selected prior to the export contains subordinate objects, you can create a separate
export file for each subordinate object. Use the option buttons in the "Selection" area to make
your selection.
● Object
Only the selected object (parameter export)
● Object with all subordinate objects
Only the selected object/device with directly subordinate substructures (networks are not
considered) (parameter and structure exports)
● Object with all subordinate objects and networks
The selected object/device, including all subordinate substructures (parameter and
structure exports)

List
The list in the dialog box shows the objects for which an export file is to be generated, based
on the option selected in the "Selection" area.
The following icons are used to indicate the processing status:

Icon Status
The export was performed without error.

Messages and warnings occurred during the export.

The export was not performed due to an error.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

178 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM
9.1 "File" menu

Icon Status
The object is currently being processed elsewhere.

The export was not performed for this device.

The function is not supported by this device.

Export is currently underway for this device.

Display
The dialog box is updated during the export process.
"Status" display
● During the process, the display field shows the entry "Export: action started.".
● Once the process is complete, the display field shows the entry "Export: action completed
without error.".

Messages
Errors and warnings are entered in the message log.

Start
Starts the export.

Stop
Stops the export.
The object currently being processed will be completely processed.

Close
Closes the dialog box.

9.1.3 Importing

This menu command starts the import of device data from an XML file to a PDM object.
Make the settings for the import of device data in the "Import - <object name>" dialog.
If a device is opened twice, for example, by opening the higher-level network and by opening
it directly, this menu command is grayed out in the second window and can only be accessed
in the window that was opened first.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 179
Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM
9.1 "File" menu

See also
"Import - ..." dialog box (Page 180)

9.1.3.1 "Import - ..." dialog box

In the "Import - <Object name>" dialog box, make the settings for the import of device data
and start the import function.
The import assigns the data created for a device of network by the export to XML files to an
existing device or network. You can select these XML files as the import file.

Import file
In the "Import file" input box, enter the XML file that contains the data of the required device
or network.
As soon as you enter the import file (parameter import file or structure import file), a device
type consistency check is performed automatically. You can find information on this in the
section "Importing configuration and parameter assignment data (Page 136)".

"Import identification data" check box

You can use the "Import identification data" check box to make the following settings:
● "Import identification data" check box activated (default)
The following data of the parameter export file are exported:
– Device name
– Description
– Message
● "Import identification data" check box deactivated
Certain identification data, i.e., device name, description, and message, are excluded from
the import.

"Import device parameters" check box

You can activate the "Import device parameters" check box to make the following settings:
● "Import device parameters" check box selected (default)
The data record of the parameter export file is completely imported.
● "Import device parameters" check box cleared
The data record of the parameter export file is not imported.

Parameter import
If the file to be imported is a parameter export file, only the exported object appears in the tree
view. The object is shown with a blue icon because the object model was not adapted in the
project. The object is prepared for the parameter import, which is started using the "Start"
button.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

180 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM
9.1 "File" menu

Parameter export files can only be imported to device objects or "placeholder objects. A
"placeholder object" is an object that is produced by the "Insert object" command without a
specific type selection.

Note
For FF devices, the type of the object to be imported must correspond exactly to the type of
the start object. If they do not match, a corresponding message is displayed in the "Status"
text box and the import cannot be started.

The actual import is started using the "Start" button.

The import is interrupted by the following message dialog box if the object types are different.
If you nevertheless want to continue the import, you can expect the following results:
– No parameters will be deleted or added.
– Only parameters with the same name will be overwritten in the target object.

Structure import
If the file to be imported is a structure export file, the structure of the exported object appears
in the tree view. All device objects are "grayed out". This is an indicator that these objects have
not yet be included in the configuration.
Structure export files can only be imported for objects of a compatible type or for "placeholder
objects". A "placeholder object" is an object that is produced by the "Insert object" command
without a specific EDD selection.
The import operation is started using the "Start" button.

Phase 1
First, the object structures in the project data storage are adapted as needed:
● Missing objects are generated. For device objects, the check to determine whether an
object is 'missing' relies exclusively on address information and not on the name information.
● Adaptation of the type assignment after a positive consistency check.
● If the "Import identification data" check box is selected, the identification data is adapted.

Note
During Phase 1, the import cannot be canceled.

Phase 2
The object structure based on the file to be imported is structured after conclusion of "Phase
1". All device objects are shown in "blue" to indicate that they have been incorporated in the
configuration.
If problems occur during the creation of the object structure, the relevant import objects are
marked in the tree and messages are generated. These can be called up using the "Messages"

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 181
Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM
9.1 "File" menu

button.
In Phase 2, the parameter import occurs for all objects in the file to be imported.

Note
During "Phase 2", the import can be canceled. The object currently being processed will be
completely processed.

After the conclusion of "Phase 1", "Phase 2" starts automatically. The parameter import then
follows for all import objects for which an error was not signaled during the first pass.

List
During the import process, the "Import" dialog box shows which objects have been processed
so far in a tree.
The following icons are used to indicate the processing status:

Icon Status
The import was performed without error.

Messages and warnings occurred during the import.

The import was not performed due to an error.

The object is currently being processed elsewhere.

The import was not performed for this device.

The function is not supported by this device.

The import is currently running for this device.

Display
The dialog box is updated during the import.
"Status" display
● During the process, the display field shows the entry "Import: action started.".
● Once the process is complete, the display field shows the entry "Import: action completed
without error.".

Messages
Errors and warnings are entered in the message log.

Start
Starts the import.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

182 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM
9.1 "File" menu

Stop
Stops the import.
The object currently being processed will be completely processed.

Close
Closes the dialog box.

9.1.4 Print
You can print out the parameter list for a device.

Setting the printer options

Note
Note the following:
● The printer options depend on your computer's operating system and on the printer being
used.
● The file is sent to the default printer.
● If the printout has more than one page, two periods are printed after the page number in
the bottom right corner of the page. The last page does not have these periods, indicating
no more pages are to follow.

Requirements
● SIMATIC PDM is open.
● In the structure view, an object is selected in the root folder of a device.
You can find information on the structure view in the section "Structure view (Page 73)".

Procedure
1. Select the menu command File > Print or click the "Print" button .
The "Print" dialog box opens.
2. Select the required options.
3. Click "OK".

9.1.5 Exit

This command closes the "SIMATIC PDM" program.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 183
Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM
9.1 "File" menu

If changes have been made in the current session, a prompt appears giving you the option of
saving the file before closing the program.

9.1.5.1 "Save changes?" dialog box

This dialog box indicates that changes have been made, which have yet to be saved.
● Click "Yes" if you want to save the changes.
● Click "No" if you want to discard the changes.
● Click "Cancel" if you do not want to exit SIMATIC PDM yet.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

184 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM
9.2 Editing (depends on device)

9.2 Editing (depends on device)

The menus and dialog boxes can contain other device-specific menu commands.
If a device is opened twice, for example, by opening the higher-level network and by opening
it directly, device-specific functions are grayed out in the second window and can only be
accessed in the window that was opened first.

Note
Device-specific menu items and help for these menu items are derived from the device
description assigned to the object. You will find device-specific information in the online help
and in the documentation provided by the device manufacturer. The PDF file associated with
this documentation does not contain any device-specific information.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 185
Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM
9.3 "Device" menu

9.3 "Device" menu

The menus and dialog boxes can contain other device-specific menu commands.
If a device is opened twice, for example, by opening the higher-level network and by opening
it directly, device-specific functions are grayed out in the second window and can only be
accessed in the window that was opened first.

Note
Device-specific menu items and help for these menu items are derived from the device
description assigned to the object. You will find device-specific information in the online help
and in the documentation provided by the device manufacturer. The PDF file associated with
this documentation does not contain any device-specific information.

9.3.1 Download to device

This menu command writes the parameters shown in the parameter table to the device.
If you are not yet online, SIMATIC PDM makes an online connection at this time.
If a device is opened twice, for example, by opening the higher-level network and by opening
it directly, this menu command is grayed out in the second window and can only be accessed
in the window that was opened first.

Errors and messages

During the loading, all errors and messages are shown immediately. Any errors occurring in
a device do not cause the entire action to be aborted; they only apply to the device that is
currently being processed. Errors and other messages are saved and can be displayed at a
later time.
Suppressing message dialogs
You can suppress message dialogs during the loading. Select the "Execute 'Load' without info
dialogs" check box. You can find additional information using the Options > SIMATIC PDM >
Settings > The "Load" tab (Page 260) menu command.

Additional information
You can find information on loading FF devices in the PCS 7 FOUNDATION Fieldbus
commissioning manual

See also
"Download to device - ..." dialog box (Page 187)

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

186 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM
9.3 "Device" menu

9.3.1.1 "Download to device - ..." dialog box

In this dialog box, you enter the desired settings for downloading the configuration data to the
devices.

"Select" area
If the object selected prior to loading contains subordinate objects, you can load the
configuration to all subordinate objects. Use the option buttons in the "Select" area to make
your selection.
● Object
● Object with all subordinate objects
● Object with all subordinate objects and networks

Field Explanations/operating instructions

Object Loads only the data of the selected object.
Object with all subordi‐ Loads the data of the selected object, including all subordinate objects.
nate objects Note:
The tree structure can be expanded and collapsed for objects with subordi‐
nate objects.
Object with all subordi‐ Loads the data of the selected object, including all subordinate substruc‐
nate objects and net‐ tures.
works

"Load changed parameters only" check box

If this check box is selected, only the changed parameters are transmitted to the devices.

List
The list in the dialog box shows the objects that are to be loaded in accordance with the option
button that has been activated in the "Select" area.
The processing status is indicated by the following icons:

Icon Status
Loading was performed without error.

Messages and warnings occurred during the loading.

Loading was aborted due to an error.

The object is currently being processed elsewhere.

Loading has never been performed for this device.

Loading was not performed because the action is not supported by the device type.

Loading is currently underway for this device.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 187
Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM
9.3 "Device" menu

Display
The dialog box is updated while the data is being loaded.
Status display
● During the process, the loading progress is indicated as a percentage for the relevant
device.
● Once the process is complete, the display field shows the entry "Result".

Message log
● The message log shows errors and warnings or outputs from the EDD.

See also
Overview of Device Icons (Page 140)

9.3.2 Upload to PG/PC

This menu command reads the parameters of the device and displays them in the parameter
table.
If you are not yet online, SIMATIC PDM makes an online connection at this time.
If a device is opened twice, for example, by opening the higher-level network and by opening
it directly, this menu command is grayed out in the second window and can only be accessed
in the window that was opened first.

Note
Before uploading to PG/PC from remote I/Os, you need to add a corresponding number of
empty modules below the head module in the configuration.

Errors and messages

During the loading, all errors and messages are shown immediately. Any errors occurring in
a device do not cause the entire action to be aborted; they only apply to the device that is
currently being processed. Errors and other messages are saved and can be displayed at a
later time.
Suppressing message dialogs
You can suppress message dialogs during the loading. Select the "Execute 'Load' without info
dialogs" check box. You can find additional information using the Options > SIMATIC PDM >
Settings > The "Load" tab (Page 260) menu command.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

188 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM
9.3 "Device" menu

Additional information
You can find information on loading FF devices in the PCS 7 FOUNDATION Fieldbus
commissioning manual

See also
"Upload to PG/PC - ..." dialog box (Page 189)

9.3.2.1 "Upload to PG/PC - ..." dialog box

In this dialog box, you enter the desired settings for uploading the data from the devices to the
configuration data.

"Select" area
If the object selected prior to loading contains subordinate objects, you can load the
configuration to all subordinate objects. Use the option buttons in the "Select" area to make
your selection.
● Object
● Object with all subordinate objects
● Object with all subordinate objects and networks

Field Explanations/operating instructions

Object Loads only the data of the selected object.
Object with all subordi‐ Loads the data of the selected object, including all subordinate objects.
nate objects Note:
The tree structure can be expanded and collapsed for objects with subordi‐
nate objects.
Object with all subordi‐ Loads the data of the selected object, including all subordinate substruc‐
nate objects and net‐ tures.
works

List
The list in the dialog box shows the objects that are to be loaded in accordance with the option
button that has been activated in the "Select" area.
The processing status is indicated by the following icons.
You can find more detailed information on icons in the section "Overview of Device Icons
(Page 140)".

Icon Status
Loading was performed without error.

Messages and warnings occurred during the loading.

Loading was aborted due to an error.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 189
Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM
9.3 "Device" menu

Icon Status
The object is currently being processed elsewhere.

Loading has never been performed for this device.

Loading was not performed because the action is not supported by the device type.

Loading is currently underway for this device.

Display
The dialog box is updated while the data is being loaded.
Status display
● During the process, the loading progress is indicated as a percentage for the relevant
device.
● Once the process is complete, the display field shows the entry "Result".

Message log
● The message log only shows errors and warnings or outputs from the EDD.

9.3.3 Assign address and TAG

In the "Assign address and TAG" dialog box, you can assign new addresses and device names
to a device:
● PROFIBUS field devices
● FF field devices
If a device is opened twice, for example, by opening the higher-level network and by opening
it directly, this menu command is grayed out in the second window and can only be accessed
in the window that was opened first.

Changing the address and TAG online

For devices that can be reached online you can execute the following changes via the "Assign
address and TAG" menu command:
● Move devices to any address within the segment or to a configured place
● For FF field devices: Change device name

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

190 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM
9.3 "Device" menu

Consistency check
● The name or the address cannot be changed in the object.
● The target address is occupied and/or is located in an unauthorized area.
● The device name is unauthorized and/or already present in the segment.

Procedure
1. Open SIMATIC PDM for a configured device:
– In the process device view, select the Edit > Open object menu command.
– Double-click the device in HW Config.
2. Select the Device > Assign address and TAG ... menu command.
3. In the "Online" area, enter the following for the device located in the plant:
– The address (mandatory with PROFIBUS devices)
– Only possible with FF field devices:
The device designation (TAG) of the field device in the plant configuration
4. Click "Find":
– A search is performed for a device at the online address entered.
– If a device is found, the online data is displayed.
– The "Transfer" button is now enabled.
5. Click "Transfer".

Note
Restart
Changing the address will restart the device.

Additional information
● Section ""Assign address and TAG..." dialog box (Page 191)"
● Section "Working with the LifeList (Page 145)"

9.3.3.1 "Assign address and TAG..." dialog box

Requirement
An online connection to the field device must be available to execute this function.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 191
Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM
9.3 "Device" menu

Required steps
The application of the function consists of the following steps:
1. Find
Establish an online connection to a device with the relevant device address.
2. Transfer
Transfer address and TAG to the device to which the online connection has been
established.

Buttons

Button Function
Find You can use the search function to search for a device address online.
Button in the Search criterion:
target device ● For PROFIBUS devices: Online address only
area (online)
● For FF devices: The online address or the device name
The name and address of an online device found is displayed.
Transfer If there is an online connection to a device, you can transfer the project data entered in the "Name/TAG"
(Device: and "Address" input boxes to the device.
Project) area If the operation is successful (status \"Transfer succeeded\"), the same information is in both boxes.
Reset address ● The "Reset address" button is only available for FF devices.
(only available ● The function "moves" the device to the area for temporary FF devices (reserved address range for FF
for FF devices) devices: Addresses 248 to 251). The name (TAG) remains unchanged.
● You can verify execution with LifeList .

Note
Restart
Changing the address will restart the device.

Note
Address or name (TAG) occupied
If the address or name (TAG) is occupied, then the action will not be performed. A
corresponding message will be displayed.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

192 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM
9.3 "Device" menu

Device information
In the dialog box, the following data is shown for both the device in the project (source) and
the detected device (online):
● Manufacturer
● Device type
● Device revision

See also
Working with the LifeList (Page 145)

9.3.4 Value comparison

Starts the comparison of device parameters.

You make the settings for comparing device parameters in the "Value Comparison" dialog
box (Page 193).

See also
Parameter table (Page 74)

9.3.4.1 "Value Comparison" dialog box

Purpose
You start the comparison of device parameters in this dialog box. The value comparison is
always based on the device parameter values saved in the project.
The device parameter values saved in the project can be compared with the following data
types:
● Offline data
Device parameter values saved in the project.
● Online data
Parameter values currently saved in the device.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 193
Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM
9.3 "Device" menu

Comparisons
The following comparisons are possible:
● Comparison of the parameters of one device (offline/online parameter comparison)
● Comparison of the parameters of two devices:
– Offline/online parameter comparison

Selecting check boxes

The loaded object is the one which is currently selected in SIMATIC PDM in parameter
assignment mode.

Comparison object Check box Additional information

Online data of the loa‐ Compare with online data of 1. Click "Apply". The online data is read in
ded object the loaded object from the device.
2. Click "OK".
Offline data of another Compare with offline data of 1. Click "Select object" dialog box
object another object (Page 194).
Online data of another Compare with online data of The dialog box opens.
object another object 2. Select the comparison object that you want
to search for.
3. Click "Apply". The online data or offline
data of the comparison object is read.
4. Click "OK".

Display
The Parameter table (Page 74) is expanded by the columns for value, unit and status of the
comparison object. These columns cannot be edited.

Display Meaning
No color difference in columns The respective parameters and the associated values are iden‐
tical for both devices.
A yellow box in the value or unit col‐ The parameter is available in both devices. The associated
umn of the comparison object. values are different.
Yellow box in the parameter column The parameter is only available in one device.
A plant-specific value check must be carried out. Automatic
analysis is not possible.
The value has been changed.

9.3.4.2 "Select object" dialog box

Use this dialog box to select the required comparison objects or partner objects.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

194 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM
9.3 "Device" menu

9.3.5 Object properties

Displays general information about the selected object.

This information is stored together with the parameter set.
Depending on the device, some of this information can be transferred to the device, for
example:
● TAG
● Message
● Description
● Address
● ...

9.3.5.1 "General" tab

Purpose
On this tab you will find information on the PDM object and you can enter additional information,
if you so wish.
You can find information on this in the section ""Options" menu (Page 256)".

Field Explanations/operating instructions

Object name (TAG)* The name of the PDM object assigned during configuration is entered here
as a default.
You can enter a new object name. The change is applied everywhere where
reference is made to the object name. The name is only visibly updated once
the change has been saved or (in some cases) when the object concerned
is next opened.
Description* Enter a comment for the object here, e.g. plant area and function, or leave
the field blank.
Message* Enter a message here for a service technician, for example, or leave the field
blank.
Text 1*
Text 2* Enter additional information here or leave the field blank.
Text 3*
Author Displays the name of the author.
Date created Displays the date on which the PDM object was created.
Last change Displays the date on which the last change was made.
Comment* Enter a comment here or leave the field blank.
"System configuration" If this option is activated, the object is linked with the system for hardware
check box configuration (e.g. with STEP 7/HW Config).
License information Shows the utilization of the TAG licenses (number of tags used and licensed
TAGs).

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 195
Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM
9.3 "Device" menu

Field Explanations/operating instructions

Priority* Select an object marking here (nothing, important, SIF).
This value is then displayed in a "Priority" column in the plant view.
Device checked Shows the time stamp for when the attribute "Device checked (Page 211)"
was activated.
Project-specific write Shows the time stamp for when the attribute "Project-specific write protec‐
protection tion (Page 250)" was activated.

* Entry can be changed.

9.3.5.2 "Device" tab

Purpose
You display the device data in this tab.
The contents of the fields cannot be changed. The contents are derived from the device
description assigned to the object provided they are entered in this description.
Some entries are displayed as codes instead of plain text.

Field Explanations/operating instructions

Device type Shows the device type as specified in the "Device Selection" dialog box.
Manufacturer Shows the manufacturer.
Order number Shows the order number of the device.
Catalog path Shows the catalog path.
Device DDL Shows the device description file assigned to the object.
EDD revision Shows the version of the device description file (hexadecimal format).
Device revision Shows the hardware version of the device (hexadecimal format).

9.3.5.3 "Diagnostics" tab

Purpose
This tab shows information about the communication of the device. The icon shown for the
device depends on the information available. If communication is disrupted, the device status
and the date of the last test are empty.

Field Explanations/operating instructions

Communication status Shows whether the communication is good or faulty.
Last communication Shows the date on which the last communication with the device took place.
Message text Shows detailed information about the communication as well as communi‐
cation errors or connection problems.
Device status Shows specific information about the status of the connected device.
Last check Shows the date when the device was last tested.
Message text Shows detailed information about the device status.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

196 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM
9.3 "Device" menu

"Update Diagnostics" button

Click the "Update Diagnostics" button if required.

9.3.5.4 "Communication" tab

Purpose
In this tab, you can display the address of a device (short address and long address for HART
devices). If the device was configured in the process devices network view, you can change
the address.

Field Explanations/operating instructions

Short address* The short address is displayed here for HART devices.
(default value: 0)
Long address* For HART devices, the long address is displayed here.
(default value: As soon as the device is known, the long address is stored.
0x0000000000)
DP master address* The address of the hierarchical master on the bus. This parameter is optional
(default value: 0) – this value is ignored when configuring via HW Config.
IP address The address that is based on the Internet protocol.
(default value: 0.0.0.0)

* Entry can be changed.

Table 9-1 "Properties" area

Field Explanations/operating instructions

Master type The HART modem uses the serial port of a PC and a HART modem or HART
(default value: Secon‐ interface connected to it to communicate with the connected HART devices.
dary master) It can be both primary and secondary master.
"Ignore secondary mas‐ If there is no secondary master, the time behavior can be optimized and
ter" check box devices can be addressed faster by enabling this option.
"Prefer 'Long address'" Once a device is known, communication with it is performed only via the long
check box address. In this case, multiple devices on the same HART modem can have
the short address 0. To make a device known with short address, no other
devices can be connected to the HART modem.
MODBUS communica‐ Serial:
tion COM interface must be suitably set for the device (interface, baud rate, etc.).
(default value: Serial) IrDA: USB infrared adapter required. The device (1 at a time) then commu‐
nicates via this adapter. (Multiple USB IR adapters are not supported.)
Response time* This is the time waited to obtain a response from a MODBUS device. If this
(default value: 1000 ms) value is too low, it is possible that no connection to the device will be made.
If it is too high, the communication can be extremely slow.
Subnet ID* The S7 subnet ID of the network. This parameter is optional – this value is
(default value: 0x0000 ignored when configuring via HW Config.
0x0000)

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 197
Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM
9.3 "Device" menu

Field Explanations/operating instructions

PROFIBUS CP slot* The slot address of the PROFIBUS interface. This parameter is optional –
(default value: 2) this value is ignored when configuring via HW Config.
Rack no. Number of the rack. The rack no. can only be 0 or 1.
(default value: 0)

* Entry can be changed.

NOTICE
HART device replacement
For a device replacement, this long address must be set to 0 so that a replacement device
can be newly identified.
The replacement device must be the only device on the HART modem.

The "Redundancy" area is displayed for field devices which are capable of redundant
interconnection.

Table 9-2 "Redundancy" area

Field Explanations/operating instructions

"Redundancy activated" There is a redundant partner device for this device.
check box
Corresponding slave The redundant partner device can be found via this field.
Select object* A new object can be added with this button.

* Entry can be changed.

A network adapter can be selected for ETHERNET or PROFIBUS devices.

Table 9-3 "Assign assigned network and network adapter" area

Field Explanations/operating instructions

Assigned network The selected interface is displayed in this field.
Assign network to interface* A network can be added to the selected interface with this button.
"Use 'PG/PC Interface' set‐ This device uses an PG/PC interface.
tings" check box*
"Use network adapter" check This device uses a network adapter.
box*
Network adapter* A network adapter can be selected with this field.

* Entry can be changed.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

198 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM
9.3 "Device" menu

See also
Connecting field devices to a redundant bus system (Page 118)
"Select object" dialog box (Page 119)

9.3.5.5 "Document Manager" tab

Use this tab to assign documents to a PDM object.

Actions on the "Document Manager" tab

Action To execute
File 1. Click the "..." button.
2. Navigate to the document required.
3. Click "Open".
The storage path and file name of the selected file are
displayed in the "File" box.
Title Enter a name for the document.
Test whether a document can be Select the menu command Open.
displayed
Remove a document from the list. Select the menu command Reset.

Open documents
To open the documents, select the SIMATIC PDM menu command Help > Document
Manager. Select the required document from the submenu.

9.3.6 Calibration log

Purpose

You can use the "Calibration log" function of SIMATIC PDM to create calibration logs for field
devices. You open the calibration log using the Device > Calibration log menu command.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 199
Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM
9.3 "Device" menu

Dialog box
The "Calibration log" dialog box contains the following tabs:

Tab Settings and information

Test environment ● Field device data
(Page 202) ● Operator data and test date of the calibration log
● Remarks of the operator about the test
● Comment field
● Settings for the scheduling
(default: deactivated)
– Service
– Measuring circuit test
– Calibration
Diagnostics ● Information regarding the display of the communication connection status
(Page 204) ● Information regarding the display of the device status
● Date of the last test
● Messages of the last test
Settings for measur‐ Channel-specific information (configurable: maximum of 8 channels)
ing range (Page 204) ● Channel selection
● Configurable settings for each channel:
– Measuring circuit unit
– Measuring range
– Output unit
– Output range
– Permitted deviation (setpoint/actual value)
– Comment fields
Attachments Configure files that are to be attached to the log. Files with the following exten‐
(Page 205) sions may be used:
● pdf
● doc; docx
● xls; xlsx
● txt; csv
● rtf
● jpg; jpeg; png; gif; tiff; tif; bmp
● wav; wma
● htm; html
● chm; hlp
Note:
This function is not available in the SIMATIC PDM Portal.
Comments ● Additional comments for different comment types
(Page 206)

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

200 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM
9.3 "Device" menu

9.3.6.1 Menus and dialog boxes

File menu

Log archive
Opens the dialog with the saved logs.

Save
Saves the current log in PDF format
Storage location

Note
The default storage location is determined from the PDM settings. If you want to adapt the
memory location, select the path in the "General" tab (Options > Settings for SIMATIC PDM
menu).

Print
Prints the currently displayed view.

Close
Closes the log.

Options menu

Log settings
Opens the "Log settings" dialog box.

In this dialog box, you can adapt the display of the calibration log according to your
requirements and preferences.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 201
Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM
9.3 "Device" menu

"Log settings" dialog box

● "Heading calibration log" text box.
You change the heading for the calibration log in this text box.
● "Log content" area
You configure the visibility of information in the calibration log in this area.

Name of text box Setting Visibility

Test environment You can change the heading for the Always visible
"Test environment" area in this text
box.
Identification data You can change the heading for the Always visible
"Identification data" area in this text
box.
Diagnostics You can change the heading for the If the "Visible" option is selected, this
"Diagnostics" area in this text box. area is visible in the log.
Settings for measur‐ You can change the heading for the Always visible
ing range "Settings for measuring range" area
in this text box.
Available Channels You can set the number of device -
channels between one and eight in
this text box.
Attachments You can change the heading for the If the "Visible" option is selected, this
"Attachments" area in this text box. area is visible in the log.
Comments You can change the heading for the If the "Visible" option is selected, this
"Comments" area in this text box. area is visible in the log.

Help menu

Help
Opens the help for SIMATIC PDM.
You can navigate to different help topics from the Table of Contents. The "Index" and "Find"
functions enable you to display information on specific terms.

About...
Opens the information about the version and the copyright details of SIMATIC PDM.

Tab

"Test environment" tab

Purpose
This tab displays information about the current device. You can change the names in the "Plant"
and "Tester" text boxes. Without these names, it is not possible to save and print logs.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

202 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM
9.3 "Device" menu

The following entries are possible:

● Entering comments
● Enabling scheduling for service monitoring, measuring circuit testing and calibration.

"Measuring circuit identification data" area

Field Explanations/operating instructions

Plant You can assign the plant name in this text box.
Process tag Shows the name of the process tag
Device type Shows the device type
Manufacturer Shows the manufacturer of the field device
Article number Shows the article number of the device
EDD revision Identifier for an EDD revision
Type ID Identifier for a device type in hexadecimal format.
You can find information on this in IEC 61804-3.
Device revision Identifier for a device revision

"Test details" area

Field/Area Explanations/operating instructions

Tester You can assign the name of the tester in this text box.
Date of test Shows the date of the test
Test medium
Comment Enter a comment.

"Scheduling" area

Field Explanations/operating instructions

"Service" check box If this check box is selected, you can enter a time for the next service
in the text box.
The time is monitored. When the time is reached or exceeded, the
diagnostic status of the instance is set to "Maintenance demanded".
"Measuring circuit test" check If the check box is selected, you can enter a time for the next meas‐
box uring circuit test in the text box.
The time is monitored and when it is reached or exceeded, the diag‐
nostic status of the instance is set to "Maintenance required".
"Calibration" check box If the check box is selected, you can enter a time for the next cali‐
bration in the text box.
The time is monitored and when it is reached or exceeded, the diag‐
nostic status of the instance is set to "Maintenance required".

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 203
Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM
9.3 "Device" menu

"Diagnostics" tab

Purpose
This tab displays general diagnostic information about the current device.

"Measuring circuit identification data" area

Field/button Explanations/operating instructions

Communication Shows whether the communication is good or faulty.
Device status Shows detailed information about the status of the connected device.
Last check Shows the date when the device was last tested.
Message text Shows detailed information about the device status.
"Update diagnostics" button Click the "Update diagnostics" button if required.

"Settings for measuring range" tab

Purpose
You can specify the calibration settings and the information for the measuring circuit test in
this tab.

"Selected channel" drop-down list

You can select the channel number (1 ... n) of the active channel in this drop-down list.

"Settings for measuring range for channel 1 ... n" area

Area Field Explanations/operating instructions

Measuring range Unit of measure Enter the current unit of measure.
Start value Enter the start value.
End value Enter the end value.
Output Unit of measure Enter the current unit of measure.
Start value Enter the start value.
End value Enter the end value.
Permitted deviation between Maximum permissible deviation between the ac‐
actual value and setpoint. tual value and setpoint in percent.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

204 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM
9.3 "Device" menu

Area Field Explanations/operating instructions

Characteristics Table Table column header You can enter up to ten value pairs.
Measured value The measured value is specified by the tester as a
percentage.
The unit of measure cannot be changed here.
Encoder signal of the speci‐ Value is calculated based on the settings and speci‐
fied value fied measured value.
Setpoint Value is calculated based on the settings and speci‐
fied measured value.
Actual value Adoption of the current value
Deviation in % The deviation is calculated between the actual val‐
ue and setpoint.
The field turns red as soon as the deviation is out‐
side the maximum permissible tolerance setting.
Comment on hardware Enter a comment for the hardware.
Comment on monitoring Enter a comment for the monitoring.
Comment on measuring circuit Enter a comment for the measuring circuit.

"Attachments" tab

Purpose
You can add up to five attachments in this tab, which you can then show or link to in the log.
You can delete or open previously inserted files.
Possible file types:
● pdf
● doc; docx
● xls; xlsx
● txt
● jpg

"Attachment 1 ... 5" area

Field/button Explanations/operating instructions

File -
"Select file" button Click this button to select a file as an attachment.
"Remove file" button Click this button to delete a previously added file.
"Show" button Click this button to show a previously added file.
"Heading" Enter a name for the document.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 205
Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM
9.3 "Device" menu

"Comments" tab

Purpose
You can enter additional comments in this tab.

Comment types

Area Explanations/operating instructions

Wiring error Enter a comment for this comment type.
Inappropriate measuring location
Device error
Comment on error

9.3.6.2 Menu bar

Structure
Below, you will find an overview of the calibration log menus.

Menu Submenu
File ● Log archive (Page 201)
● Save (Page 201)
● Print (Page 201)
● Close (Page 201)
Options ● Log settings (Page 201)
Help ● Help (Page 202)
● About... (Page 202)

9.3.6.3 Toolbar
The toolbar is located below the menu bar and contains several buttons. You can use the
buttons to execute frequently used menu commands without having to open the menu.

Icons
Meanings of the icons used:

Icon Menu com‐ Description

mand
Save Saves the current log as a PDF file.
(Page 201)
Print Prints the current view.
(Page 201) Opens the "Print" dialog box. Select a printer that is available on the
computer.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

206 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM
9.3 "Device" menu

Icon Menu com‐ Description

mand
Log settings Opens the "Log settings" dialog box.
(Page 201) You can adapt the log according to your requirements and preferen‐
ces in this dialog box.
Help The SIMATIC PDM help opens.
(Page 202)

9.3.7 Change log

The change log records which actions have been performed with SIMATIC PDM on objects
of the plant.

Properties
● The change log is part of the associated SIMATIC project.
● The change log is a circular log (first in, first out).
● Some boxes of the change log are created automatically. Information is entered in the
language preset in the SIMATIC project.

Note
SIMATIC PDM Client
Archived change logs cannot be opened on the SIMATIC PDM Web client.

Requirements for using the "Change Log" function

You need the "SIMATIC PDM Extended" license key to use the "Change log" function.

Entries in the change log

The "SIMATIC PDM Change Log" dialog window displays actions which have been performed
in the project or on individual objects (devices). The displayed actions depend on the object
displayed in SIMATIC PDM.
You can limit the displayed information by setting the filter. The "Action" drop-down list of the
filter shows the actions that can be displayed.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 207
Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM
9.3 "Device" menu

Note
The following actions are NOT recorded in the change log:
● Actions that were triggered from the EDD
● Operator actions that were performed in the online context

It comprises the following entries:

Column Meaning
Object identification Database identification of the object (device or network) for which a change was
made
Object name Name of the object (device or network) for which a change was made
Action Indicates which action was executed
Time Time set on the computer when the action was carried out
Description Description of action
Details Details of action
Comment Comment which a user entered before applying a change.
Prerequisite for an entry:
In the SIMATIC PDM settings, the "Show entry dialog for change log comments"
check box on the "General" tab must be selected.
User name Logon name of the user who performed the change
Computer name Name of the computer from which the change was made
Object path Name of a device with the path where the device can be found

9.3.7.1 Menus and dialog boxes

File menu

Add entry
Adds a manual entry to the change log.

Archive
Archives the entries depending on the set date.

Load archive
Loads an archived change log.
This function is not available on SIMATIC PDM Web client.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

208 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM
9.3 "Device" menu

Print
Prints the currently displayed view.

Close
Closes the change log or LifeList.

View menu

Filter
Reduces the information displayed in the change log.

Find
Finds entries in the change log after input of a search term.

"Find" dialog box

Procedure
1. Select the menu command View > Find.
The "Find" dialog box opens.
2. Enter the string you are looking for.
3. Click "Find next".

Settings in the "Find" dialog box

● Entry field
You can enter any string. You can search for this string.
● "Find next" button
The system searches through the displayed device list. The displayed change log is
searched and the found entry selected.
The next entry found is selected when you press the button again. The search starts all
over again at the end of the list.
A message will inform you if no matching entry is found.
● "Close" button
Closes the dialog.

Show all objects

Toggles the view between all objects and the object for which the change log was called.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 209
Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM
9.3 "Device" menu

Help menu

Help
Opens the help for SIMATIC PDM.
You can navigate to different help topics from the Table of Contents. The "Index" and "Find"
functions enable you to display information on specific terms.

Info
Opens the information about the version and the copyright details of SIMATIC PDM.

9.3.7.2 Menu bar

Structure
Below, you will find an overview of the Change log menus.

Menu Submenu
File ● Add entry (Page 208)
● Archive (Page 208)
● Load archive (Page 208)
● Print (Page 209)
● Close (Page 209)
View ● Filter (Page 209)
● Find (Page 209)
● Show all objects (Page 209)
Help ● Help (Page 210)
● Info (Page 210)

9.3.7.3 Toolbar
The toolbar is located below the menu bar and contains several buttons. You can use the
buttons to execute frequently used menu commands without having to open the menu.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

210 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM
9.3 "Device" menu

Icons
Meanings of the icons used:

Icon Menu com‐ Description

mand
Add entry Adds a manual entry to the change log.
(Page 208)
Print Prints the current view.
(Page 209) Opens the "Print" dialog box. Select a printer that is available on the
computer.
Filter Filters the displayed change log.
(Page 209) Opens the "Filter" dialog box. Enter a character string and specify
the filter options.
Find Searches the displayed change log.
(Page 209) Opens the "Find" dialog box. Enter a character string and specify the
search options.
Show all ob‐ Toggles the view between all objects and the view from which the
jects change log was called.
(Page 209)
Help The SIMATIC PDM help opens.
(Page 210)

9.3.8 Set device checked

The "Device checked" attribute is an independent bit memory.

An activation stamp is set at the time when the attribute is activated. This time stamp is deleted
at the time of deactivation.
There are no special access restrictions for setting the attribute. The attribute is usually set by
the service technician or the project administrator.

Function of the "Device checked" attribute

This attribute does not influence the mode of operation of the PDM. None of the internal PDM
functions depend on this attribute or are influenced by it.
The user defines the exact meaning of this attribute.
Devices with the set attribute can be queried, displayed and exported with the appropriate filter
setting using the maintenance station.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 211
Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM
9.3 "Device" menu

Procedure
1. There are three different options to set or reset the attribute:
– Set the attribute in the PDM device properties.
– Set the attribute with the button in the toolbar.
– Set the attribute in the device menu.
In the plant view, the activation stamp is displayed in the "Device checked" column.
As soon as the attribute is changed (activated/deactivated), an entry is made in the PDM
Change Log.

9.3.9 Check configuration

You can use the "Check configuration" function for the device description connected to a PDM
object. This function checks whether the device description conforms to the EDD configuration
rules for SIMATIC PDM.

Properties
● The check for device descriptions includes all the attributes of the associated object.
● If inconsistencies are identified, SIMATIC PDM enters a description of the current state in
the log for the "Check configuration" function.

Procedure
1. Select an object (device) in the tree of the parameter view.
2. Select the Device > Check configuration menu command.
The following dialog is opened:

3. Click "Start".

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

212 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM
9.3 "Device" menu

4. You will see a message as soon when the check is completed.

– If the device description conforms to the EDD configuration rules for SIMATIC PDM, the
result indicates that the device is configured correctly.
– When the device description is configured incorrectly, the message "Messages and
warnings were issued" is displayed.

5. To display the message log, click "Messages".

The message log opens.

6. Click the "Save..." button to save the message log.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 213
Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM
9.3 "Device" menu

9.3.10 Templates...

Some manufacturers offer templates in the device descriptions (EDD) .

You can apply these templates to other devices.
When parameters are configured in a template, you can transfer a plant-specific configuration
to other devices by applying the template.

Properties
If templates are integrated into a device description, these templates are available for
integrating device descriptions in SIMATIC PDM.
If parameters of a device contained in a template are changed, the template of the device is
changed as well.

Requirement
A device is selected in the parameter view.

Use templates
1. Select the menu command Device > Templates....
The list of all defined templates included in the device description of the currently selected
device is displayed. The title of the displayed templates are read from the "Label" attribute
of the template.
2. Click a template.
A table with the following columns opens:
– Parameter
– Value
– Unit
– Status
3. If you change a parameter, it will be marked with the following symbol in the "Status" column:

4. To save the device-specific changes, click "OK".

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

214 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM
9.4 "View" menu

9.4 "View" menu

The menus and dialog boxes can contain other device-specific menu commands.
If a device is opened twice, for example, by opening the higher-level network and by opening
it directly, device-specific functions are grayed out in the second window and can only be
accessed in the window that was opened first.

Note
Device-specific menu items and help for these menu items are derived from the device
description assigned to the object. You will find device-specific information in the online help
and in the documentation provided by the device manufacturer. The PDF file associated with
this documentation does not contain any device-specific information.

9.4.1 Process variables / Measured value display (depends on device)

General Information
Opens the "Process variables" or "Measured value display" online dialog box.

Structure
The dialog box and its associated help program are structured in a device-specific manner.
The information required for this is derived from the device description assigned to the object.
Therefore, this dialog box cannot be described in detail here.
The device description contains the following information:
● Structure of the individual tabs
● Which values are displayed
● Where and how the values are displayed
● Scope of the message window
● Scope and content of the device-specific help program

Status information
Status icons can be displayed for every value shown in the dialog box. You can find information
on this in the section ""Status" column of the parameter table (Page 76)".

Operator elements
● "Close" button
● "Messages" button
● "Help" button

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 215
Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM
9.4 "View" menu

Cycle time
If there is an online connection to the field device, the process variables displayed in the dialog
box are updated cyclically. To set the cycle time, select the menu command Options > SIMATIC
PDM > Settings in SIMATIC Manager and then go to the "Communication (Page 259)" tab.

9.4.2 Start LifeList

This menu command is used to call the LifeList.
LifeList makes it possible to identify active field devices without configuration. With LifeList ,
you perform a scan on one of the following network objects:
● PROFIBUS DP network
● PA network
● HART modem network
● FF network

9.4.3 Charts and trends (depends on device)

Note
History trends can be displayed in SIMATIC PDM if they are provided by the manufacturer of
the device description.

Additional information
● Section "Trend chart (Page 160)"
● Section "Work with trends (Page 167)"
● Section "Editing trends (Page 168)"
● Section "Icons and buttons (Page 164)"

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

216 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM
9.4 "View" menu

Example
The figure below shows an example of a dialog window with history trends.

9.4.3.1 Displaying process variables and measured values

Note
Functions for the display of process variables and measured values are available in SIMATIC
PDM, if they are provided by the manufacturer of the device description.

Note
If the color of the value to be displayed changes from orange to yellow, the parameter could
not be read within the monitoring time.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 217
Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM
9.4 "View" menu

Additional information
● Section "Trend chart (Page 160)"
● Section "Tachometer chart (Page 163)"
● Section "Bar chart (Page 162)"
● Section "Icons and buttons (Page 164)"
● Section "Work with trends (Page 167)"
● Section "Editing trends (Page 168)"

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

218 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM
9.5 "Diagnostics" menu

9.5 "Diagnostics" menu

The menus and dialog boxes can contain other device-specific menu commands.
If a device is opened twice, for example, by opening the higher-level network and by opening
it directly, device-specific functions are grayed out in the second window and can only be
accessed in the window that was opened first.

Note
Device-specific menu items and help for these menu items are derived from the device
description assigned to the object. You will find device-specific information in the online help
and in the documentation provided by the device manufacturer. The PDF file associated with
this documentation does not contain any device-specific information.

9.5.1 Update diagnostics

SIMATIC PDM attempts to establish an online connection to the object which is currently
selected and to update the status.
If a device is opened twice, for example, by opening the higher-level network and by opening
it directly, this menu item is grayed out in the second window and can only be accessed in the
window that was opened first.

See also
"Update diagnostics - ..." dialog box (Page 219)

9.5.1.1 "Update diagnostics - ..." dialog box

In this dialog box, you select the objects whose diagnostic status you want to update.

"Select" area
If the object selected prior to carrying out the menu command contains subordinate objects,
you can determine the diagnostic status for all subordinate objects. Use the option buttons in
the "Select" area to make your selection.
● Object
● Object with all subordinate objects
● Object with all subordinate objects and networks

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 219
Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM
9.5 "Diagnostics" menu

Field Explanations/operating instructions

Object Determines the diagnostic status of the selected object.
Object with all subordi‐ Determines the diagnostic status of the selected object, including all subor‐
nate objects dinate objects.
Note:
The tree structure can be expanded and collapsed for objects with subordi‐
nate objects.
Object with all subordi‐ Determines the diagnostic status of the selected object, including all subor‐
nate objects and net‐ dinate substructures.
works

Starting an action
The diagnostic status of the selected object is not determined automatically. Click "Start" to
start the action for the current selection.

List
The list in the dialog box shows the objects for which the diagnostic status is to be determined
based on the option selected in the "Select" area.
The processing status is indicated by the following icons:

The diagnostic status was determined.

Messages and warnings occurred during determination of the diagnostic status.

Determination of diagnostic status was aborted due to an error.

The object is currently being processed elsewhere.

Determining diagnostic status has never been performed for this device.

Determining diagnostic status was not performed because the action is not supported by
the device type.
Determination of diagnostic status is currently underway for this device.

Display
Click "Start" to execute the menu command. The dialog box is updated as long as the function
is executed or until the function is canceled.
Status display
● During the process, the progress is indicated as a percentage for the relevant device.
● Once the process is complete, the display field shows the entry "Result".

Messages
The message log shows errors and warnings or outputs from the EDD.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

220 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM
9.6 "Options" menu (depends on device)

9.6 "Options" menu (depends on device)

The menus and dialog boxes can contain other device-specific menu commands.
If a device is opened twice, for example, by opening the higher-level network and by opening
it directly, device-specific functions are grayed out in the second window and can only be
accessed in the window that was opened first.

Note
Device-specific menu items and help for these menu items are derived from the device
description assigned to the object. You will find device-specific information in the online help
and in the documentation provided by the device manufacturer. The PDF file associated with
this documentation does not contain any device-specific information.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 221
Menus and dialog boxes in SIMATIC PDM
9.7 "Help" menu

9.7 "Help" menu

9.7.1 Contents
This menu command displays the Help on SIMATIC PDM.
You can navigate to different help topics from the Table of Contents. The "Index" and "Find"
functions enable you to display information on specific terms.

9.7.2 Help for device parameters

This menu commands calls the device-specific help with descriptions of the parameters.
Note: The device-specific help is derived from the device description assigned to the object.

9.7.3 Info
This menu command displays information about the software version and the copyright.

9.7.4 Find
The displayed parameter list is scanned.
You may enter any string. You can run the search for this string.

9.7.5 Document Manager

In the submenu of the "Document Manager" menu command, you can call the documents
assigned to a PDM object.
To assign the documents, select the menu command Device > Object Properties > Document
Manager.

Additional information
● Section "Inserting plant-specific documents for process mode (Page 122)"
● Section ""Document Manager" tab (Page 199)"

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

222 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in HW
Config 10
Installing SIMATIC PDM makes additional functions available in the Edit > SIMATIC PDM
menu of HW Config.

See also
Exporting (Page 230)
Importing (Page 231)
Download to device (Page 231)
Upload to PG/PC (Page 232)
Update diagnostics (Page 233)
Start LifeList (Page 233)
Device selection (Reassign) (Page 233)
Show change log (Page 235)
Synchronizing with HW Config (Page 236)

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 223
Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in HW Config

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

224 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the
SIMATIC Manager 11
11.1 "Edit" menu

11.1.1 SIMATIC Manager > "Edit" menu

Installing SIMATIC PDM makes additional functions available in the Edit menu of SIMATIC
Manager.

Requirement
A field device or a network with subordinate field devices is selected in one of the SIMATIC
PDM views.

Functions
● Start SIMATIC PDM
Select menu command Edit > Open object.
● SIMATIC PDM functions
The following functions are available in the Edit > SIMATIC PDM menu:
– Exporting (Page 175)
– Importing (Page 179)
– Download to device (Page 186)
– Upload to PG/PC (Page 188)
– Update diagnostics (Page 219)
– Start LifeList (Page 233)
– Device selection (Reassign) (Page 233)
– Show change log (Page 235)

11.1.2 Object properties

Displays general information about the selected object.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 225
Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC Manager
11.1 "Edit" menu

This information is stored together with the parameter set.

Depending on the device, some of this information can be transferred to the device, for
example:
● TAG
● Message
● Description
● Address
● ...

11.1.2.1 "General" tab

Purpose
On this tab you will find information on the PDM object and you can enter additional information,
if you so wish.
You can find information on this in the section ""Options" menu (Page 256)".

Field Explanations/operating instructions

Object name (TAG)* The name of the PDM object assigned during configuration is entered here
as a default.
You can enter a new object name. The change is applied everywhere where
reference is made to the object name. The name is only visibly updated once
the change has been saved or (in some cases) when the object concerned
is next opened.
Description* Enter a comment for the object here, e.g. plant area and function, or leave
the field blank.
Message* Enter a message here for a service technician, for example, or leave the field
blank.
Text 1*
Text 2* Enter additional information here or leave the field blank.
Text 3*
Author Displays the name of the author.
Date created Displays the date on which the PDM object was created.
Last change Displays the date on which the last change was made.
Comment* Enter a comment here or leave the field blank.
"System configuration" If this option is activated, the object is linked with the system for hardware
check box configuration (e.g. with STEP 7/HW Config).
License information Shows the utilization of the TAG licenses (number of tags used and licensed
TAGs).
Priority* Select an object marking here (nothing, important, SIF).
This value is then displayed in a "Priority" column in the plant view.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

226 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC Manager
11.1 "Edit" menu

Field Explanations/operating instructions

Device checked Shows the time stamp for when the attribute "Device checked (Page 211)"
was activated.
Project-specific write Shows the time stamp for when the attribute "Project-specific write protec‐
protection tion (Page 250)" was activated.

* Entry can be changed.

11.1.2.2 "Device" tab

Purpose
You display the device data in this tab.
The contents of the fields cannot be changed. The contents are derived from the device
description assigned to the object provided they are entered in this description.
Some entries are displayed as codes instead of plain text.

Field Explanations/operating instructions

Device type Shows the device type as specified in the "Device Selection" dialog box.
Manufacturer Shows the manufacturer.
Order number Shows the order number of the device.
Catalog path Shows the catalog path.
Device DDL Shows the device description file assigned to the object.
EDD revision Shows the version of the device description file (hexadecimal format).
Device revision Shows the hardware version of the device (hexadecimal format).

11.1.2.3 "Diagnostics" tab

Purpose
This tab shows information about the communication of the device. The icon shown for the
device depends on the information available. If communication is disrupted, the device status
and the date of the last test are empty.

Field Explanations/operating instructions

Communication status Shows whether the communication is good or faulty.
Last communication Shows the date on which the last communication with the device took place.
Message text Shows detailed information about the communication as well as communi‐
cation errors or connection problems.
Device status Shows specific information about the status of the connected device.
Last check Shows the date when the device was last tested.
Message text Shows detailed information about the device status.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 227
Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC Manager
11.1 "Edit" menu

"Update Diagnostics" button

Click the "Update Diagnostics" button if required.

11.1.2.4 "Communication" tab

Purpose
In this tab, you can display the address of a device (short address and long address for HART
devices). If the device was configured in the process devices network view, you can change
the address.

Field Explanations/operating instructions

Short address* The short address is displayed here for HART devices.
(default value: 0)
Long address* For HART devices, the long address is displayed here.
(default value: As soon as the device is known, the long address is stored.
0x0000000000)
DP master address* The address of the hierarchical master on the bus. This parameter is optional
(default value: 0) – this value is ignored when configuring via HW Config.
IP address The address that is based on the Internet protocol.
(default value: 0.0.0.0)

* Entry can be changed.

Table 11-1 "Properties" area

Field Explanations/operating instructions

Master type The HART modem uses the serial port of a PC and a HART modem or HART
(default value: Secon‐ interface connected to it to communicate with the connected HART devices.
dary master) It can be both primary and secondary master.
"Ignore secondary mas‐ If there is no secondary master, the time behavior can be optimized and
ter" check box devices can be addressed faster by enabling this option.
"Prefer 'Long address'" Once a device is known, communication with it is performed only via the long
check box address. In this case, multiple devices on the same HART modem can have
the short address 0. To make a device known with short address, no other
devices can be connected to the HART modem.
MODBUS communica‐ Serial:
tion COM interface must be suitably set for the device (interface, baud rate, etc.).
(default value: Serial) IrDA: USB infrared adapter required. The device (1 at a time) then commu‐
nicates via this adapter. (Multiple USB IR adapters are not supported.)
Response time* This is the time waited to obtain a response from a MODBUS device. If this
(default value: 1000 ms) value is too low, it is possible that no connection to the device will be made.
If it is too high, the communication can be extremely slow.
Subnet ID* The S7 subnet ID of the network. This parameter is optional – this value is
(default value: 0x0000 ignored when configuring via HW Config.
0x0000)

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

228 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC Manager
11.1 "Edit" menu

Field Explanations/operating instructions

PROFIBUS CP slot* The slot address of the PROFIBUS interface. This parameter is optional –
(default value: 2) this value is ignored when configuring via HW Config.
Rack no. Number of the rack. The rack no. can only be 0 or 1.
(default value: 0)

* Entry can be changed.

NOTICE
HART device replacement
For a device replacement, this long address must be set to 0 so that a replacement device
can be newly identified.
The replacement device must be the only device on the HART modem.

The "Redundancy" area is displayed for field devices which are capable of redundant
interconnection.

Table 11-2 "Redundancy" area

Field Explanations/operating instructions

"Redundancy activated" There is a redundant partner device for this device.
check box
Corresponding slave The redundant partner device can be found via this field.
Select object* A new object can be added with this button.

* Entry can be changed.

A network adapter can be selected for ETHERNET or PROFIBUS devices.

Table 11-3 "Assign assigned network and network adapter" area

Field Explanations/operating instructions

Assigned network The selected interface is displayed in this field.
Assign network to interface* A network can be added to the selected interface with this button.
"Use 'PG/PC Interface' set‐ This device uses an PG/PC interface.
tings" check box*
"Use network adapter" check This device uses a network adapter.
box*
Network adapter* A network adapter can be selected with this field.

* Entry can be changed.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 229
Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC Manager
11.1 "Edit" menu

See also
Connecting field devices to a redundant bus system (Page 118)
"Select object" dialog box (Page 119)

11.1.2.5 "Document Manager" tab

Use this tab to assign documents to a PDM object.

Actions on the "Document Manager" tab

Action To execute
File 1. Click the "..." button.
2. Navigate to the document required.
3. Click "Open".
The storage path and file name of the selected file are
displayed in the "File" box.
Title Enter a name for the document.
Test whether a document can be Select the menu command Open.
displayed
Remove a document from the list. Select the menu command Reset.

Open documents
To open the documents, select the SIMATIC PDM menu command Help > Document
Manager. Select the required document from the submenu.

11.1.3 SIMATIC PDM

11.1.3.1 Synchronize
Executes synchronization for changes to the HART server in the multiplexer network.
The synchronization function takes the following into consideration:
● New hierarchy and devices are inserted.
● Hierarchies and devices that no longer exist are removed.
● Renamed devices are also renamed in PDM.

11.1.3.2 Exporting

This menu command starts the export of device data of a PDM object to an XML file.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

230 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC Manager
11.1 "Edit" menu

Make the settings for the export of device data in the "Export - <object name>" dialog.
If a device is opened twice, for example, by opening the higher-level network and by opening
it directly, this menu command is grayed out in the second window and can only be accessed
in the window that was opened first.

See also
"Export - ..." dialog box (Page 176)

11.1.3.3 Importing

This menu command starts the import of device data from an XML file to a PDM object.
Make the settings for the import of device data in the "Import - <object name>" dialog.
If a device is opened twice, for example, by opening the higher-level network and by opening
it directly, this menu command is grayed out in the second window and can only be accessed
in the window that was opened first.

See also
"Import - ..." dialog box (Page 180)

11.1.3.4 Download to device

This menu command writes the parameters shown in the parameter table to the device.
If you are not yet online, SIMATIC PDM makes an online connection at this time.
If a device is opened twice, for example, by opening the higher-level network and by opening
it directly, this menu command is grayed out in the second window and can only be accessed
in the window that was opened first.

Errors and messages

During the loading, all errors and messages are shown immediately. Any errors occurring in
a device do not cause the entire action to be aborted; they only apply to the device that is
currently being processed. Errors and other messages are saved and can be displayed at a
later time.
Suppressing message dialogs
You can suppress message dialogs during the loading. Select the "Execute 'Load' without info
dialogs" check box. You can find additional information using the Options > SIMATIC PDM >
Settings > The "Load" tab (Page 260) menu command.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 231
Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC Manager
11.1 "Edit" menu

Additional information
You can find information on loading FF devices in the PCS 7 FOUNDATION Fieldbus
commissioning manual

See also
"Download to device - ..." dialog box (Page 187)

11.1.3.5 Upload to PG/PC

This menu command reads the parameters of the device and displays them in the parameter
table.
If you are not yet online, SIMATIC PDM makes an online connection at this time.
If a device is opened twice, for example, by opening the higher-level network and by opening
it directly, this menu command is grayed out in the second window and can only be accessed
in the window that was opened first.

Note
Before uploading to PG/PC from remote I/Os, you need to add a corresponding number of
empty modules below the head module in the configuration.

Errors and messages

During the loading, all errors and messages are shown immediately. Any errors occurring in
a device do not cause the entire action to be aborted; they only apply to the device that is
currently being processed. Errors and other messages are saved and can be displayed at a
later time.
Suppressing message dialogs
You can suppress message dialogs during the loading. Select the "Execute 'Load' without info
dialogs" check box. You can find additional information using the Options > SIMATIC PDM >
Settings > The "Load" tab (Page 260) menu command.

Additional information
You can find information on loading FF devices in the PCS 7 FOUNDATION Fieldbus
commissioning manual

See also
"Upload to PG/PC - ..." dialog box (Page 189)

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

232 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC Manager
11.1 "Edit" menu

11.1.3.6 Update diagnostics

SIMATIC PDM attempts to establish an online connection to the object which is currently
selected and to update the status.
If a device is opened twice, for example, by opening the higher-level network and by opening
it directly, this menu item is grayed out in the second window and can only be accessed in the
window that was opened first.

See also
"Update diagnostics - ..." dialog box (Page 219)

11.1.3.7 Start LifeList

This menu command is used to call the LifeList.
LifeList makes it possible to identify active field devices without configuration. With LifeList ,
you perform a scan on one of the following network objects:
● PROFIBUS DP network
● PA network
● HART modem network
● FF network

11.1.3.8 Device selection (Reassign)

Use this menu to assign a different or new device description (EDD) to an object.
The devices are structured by the device types in a tree structure.

Note
Integrated devices
You can only select devices for which a device description file has been integrated via the
Device Integration Manager.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 233
Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC Manager
11.1 "Edit" menu

Device description dependency

When a device is replaced in a plant, you have to update the project in SIMATIC PDM. When
devices are replaced in a plant, the following situations can arise:
● Device descriptions are compatible
The device to be replaced can be operated with the device description of the device to be
integrated (e.g. after updating the firmware).
The configuration can be downloaded to the device to be integrated.
● Device descriptions are incompatible
The device to be replaced cannot be operated with the device description of the device to
be integrated, e.g. a device is replaced with one from a different manufacturer.
The device to be replaced should be removed from the configuration when it is replaced
with an incompatible device. Reconfigure the device.
Recommendation:
Export the device data before making the change, because the device will be initialized
again with the new device description.
The following steps describe how to reassign the device description.

Assigning a device description to an object

You have the following options for assigning a device description to an object:
● Identify a device via an online connection
● Assigning the device description manually

Identify a device via an online connection

If you have an online connection to the device, click the "Device identification" button.
● "Device identification" button
When you click this button, a connection to the device is established and an attempt is
made to read the information from the device and assign the required device description
to it.
● If not all the necessary information could be read out, you need to assign the device
description manually. After device identification, the tree structure includes a preselection
with paths designed for the device.
Select one of these paths.
● If device identification is not unique, select the required device in the result list and click
the "Device identification" button again.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

234 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC Manager
11.1 "Edit" menu

Assigning the device description manually

Select the required device description from the "Device catalog" list, based on the following
data:
● Manufacturer
● Device type
● Device revision and DD revision
Note
Note on remote I/Os
With remote I/O, you search for the manufacturer and a type for the head-end station during
device selection.
Assign the required device description to the device.

Device description missing from PC

Open the Device Integration Manager and integrate the missing device descriptions.

See also
Integrating device descriptions (Page 51)

11.1.3.9 Show change log

The change log records which actions have been performed with SIMATIC PDM on objects
of the plant.

Properties
● The change log is part of the associated SIMATIC project.
● The change log is a circular log (first in, first out).
● Some boxes of the change log are created automatically. Information is entered in the
language preset in the SIMATIC project.

Note
SIMATIC PDM Client
Archived change logs cannot be opened on the SIMATIC PDM Web client.

Requirements for using the "Change Log" function

You need the "SIMATIC PDM Extended" license key to use the "Change log" function.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 235
Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC Manager
11.1 "Edit" menu

Entries in the change log

The "SIMATIC PDM Change Log" dialog window displays actions which have been performed
in the project or on individual objects (devices). The displayed actions depend on the object
displayed in SIMATIC PDM.
You can limit the displayed information by setting the filter. The "Action" drop-down list of the
filter shows the actions that can be displayed.

Note
The following actions are NOT recorded in the change log:
● Actions that were triggered from the EDD
● Operator actions that were performed in the online context

It comprises the following entries:

Column Meaning
Object identification Database identification of the object (device or network) for which a change was
made
Object name Name of the object (device or network) for which a change was made
Action Indicates which action was executed
Time Time set on the computer when the action was carried out
Description Description of action
Details Details of action
Comment Comment which a user entered before applying a change.
Prerequisite for an entry:
In the SIMATIC PDM settings, the "Show entry dialog for change log comments"
check box on the "General" tab must be selected.
User name Logon name of the user who performed the change
Computer name Name of the computer from which the change was made
Object path Name of a device with the path where the device can be found

11.1.3.10 Synchronizing with HW Config

Starts the synchronization of PDM objects with HW Config objects.
You can select the "Synchronize with HW Config" menu command in process device plant
view or the process device network view. This menu command starts the synchronization of
PDM objects with HW Config objects.
The message log shows any warnings, errors and information relating to the synchronization
or synchronization conflicts.
If SIMATIC PDM is installed, but there is no valid license, the following "message" is displayed:
You are attempting to start configuration/engineering for SIMATIC PDM with insufficient
licensing. If you answer Yes, synchronization between HW Config and the SIMATIC PDM
database will be necessary after sufficient licensing. Do you want to continue?
If you answer with "yes", you allow all HW Config actions during this session regardless of
SIMATIC PDM licenses.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

236 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC Manager
11.1 "Edit" menu

If you continue with "No", the license check of SIMATIC PDM becomes active for this HW
Config session.

11.1.3.11 Create stand-alone project

The substructures of an existing, integrated project can be applied to a PDM stand-alone
project.

Procedure
1. Open the process device network view.
2. Create an Ethernet network.
3. Select the created Ethernet network.
4. In the Properties > Communication shortcut menu, enter the subnet ID with which you PC
is connected.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 237
Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC Manager
11.1 "Edit" menu

5. Start the function "Import from existing station".

A dialog opens in which you can see all projects.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

238 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC Manager
11.1 "Edit" menu

6. Select the project whose substructure you want to apply.

A dialog opens that shows all automation stations that are connected to the Ethernet subnet
ID.

7. Select an automation station and click "Import".

The import starts.
The corresponding substructures are created below the Ethernet network.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 239
Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC Manager
11.2 "Insert" menu

11.2 "Insert" menu

11.2.1 Inserting an object

Installing SIMATIC PDM makes additional functions available in SIMATIC Manager. These
can be accessed by selecting the menu command Insert > SIMATIC PDM.
Select the PDM object that you want to insert. Depending on the object selected in SIMATIC
Manager, only objects which can be inserted at the selected object are available.

Requirement
One of the following views is open:
● Process device network view
● Process device plant view

Purpose
The configured view determines which of the following object types can be inserted:
● Object
● Networks
● Interface
● Communications network
● Devices

Insert > SIMATIC PDM > <submenu>

Networks (process device network view) and devices (process device plant view)
● You can select the "Networks" menu command in the process device network view. This
menu command expands the tree structure by adding the "Networks" folder for working
with PDM objects.
● You can select the "Devices" menu command in the process device network view. This
menu command expands the tree structure by adding the "Devices" folder for working with
PDM objects.
Note
"Networks" (process device network view) and "Devices" (process device plant view) folders
If you want to reuse copied projects without PDM objects, you can delete this folder
including the PDM configuration it contains. Select the following function in the SIMATIC
Manager: File > Save As... with the "With reorganization (slow)" check box selected.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

240 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC Manager
11.2 "Insert" menu

Communications network (process device network view)

In the process device network view, you can create the following communications networks
under the "Networks" folder:
● Ethernet network
● HART modem network
● HART server (multiplexer network)
● MODBUS network
● PROFIBUS DP network.
● PROFINET network
Selecting the menu command opens the selection dialog ("Insert object - <...>" dialog box).
You can use the menu command to create the following objects:
● Only when downloading the first time:
The "PC station" object (PDM computer, computer on which PDM is installed)
● The communications network

Password protection
If there is password protection for communication with a PROFINET network, follow these
steps:
1. In the shortcut menu, select the menu command Update connection data.
The dialog box "The station is password protected" appears.
2. Enter the password in the input box.
3. Click "OK".

Objects
● Process device network view
In the process device network view, you can create objects for field devices. This is done
at a communications network.
Selecting the menu command opens the selection dialog ("Insert object - <...>" dialog box).
Click the "Assign Device Type..." button. The "SIMATIC PDM device selection" dialog box
opens. Select the field devices in the tree structure.
● Process device plant view
You can create objects (objects for field devices) in the process device plant view under
the "Devices" folder.
Selecting the menu command opens the selection dialog ("Insert object - <...>" dialog box).
Click the "Assign Device Type..." button. The "SIMATIC PDM device selection" dialog box
opens. Select the field devices in the tree structure.

Interface (process device network view)

You can add an interface to a PC object in the process device network view.
Select the PC object and then the menu command Insert New Object > Interface in the shortcut
menu.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 241
Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC Manager
11.2 "Insert" menu

SIMATIC PDM offers the following three interface types:

● DP interface (PROFIBUS DP interface via CP module)
You can make additional network settings (Page 197) for a PROFIBUS DP interface.
● COM interface (serial interface via COM1, COM2)
● ETHERNET interface
You can make additional network settings (Page 197) for an ETHERNET interface.

Network Required
PROFIBUS DP network DP interface
HART modem network COM interface
MODBUS network COM interface
S7 DSGW network Ethernet interface
HART server (multiplexer network) Installation of the HCF OPC server

See also
"Communication" tab (Page 197)

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

242 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC Manager
11.3 "View" menu

11.3 "View" menu

11.3.1 Process devices plant view

The process devices plant view provides an overview of all configured devices in all configured
networks.
This view is used to obtain a quick overview of the configured devices. You cannot configure
new networks in this view.

Opening and adapting the process devices plant view

Opening the process devices plant view (Page 68)
Adapting the process device plant view (Page 69)

See also
"Settings" for the SIMATIC project (Page 85)
PDM parameter view (Page 250)
Toolbar in the "Process device plant view" dialog box (Page 244)
Messages (Page 68)
Menus and dialog boxes in the "Process device plant view" dialog box (Page 244)

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 243
Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC Manager
11.3 "View" menu

11.3.2 Menus and dialog boxes in the "Process device plant view" dialog box

11.3.2.1 Toolbar in the "Process device plant view" dialog box

The toolbar is located below the menu bar and contains a number of icons with which you can
quickly perform frequently used menu commands without having to open a menu and select
the command.

Icons and functions

The objects are linked to the following menu commands:

Objects in the toolbar Menu command

Exporting (Page 175)

Importing (Page 179)

Download to device (Page 186)

Upload to PG/PC (Page 188)

Update diagnostics (Page 219)

Device Selection (Reassign) (Page 248)

"Project" selection box Select the project. You can find more information on this in the section
""Project" selection box (Page 249)".
Input box (for search strings) This box is an input box for search strings:
Enter a search string. You can find more information on this in the
section "Find (Page 249)".

11.3.2.2 "File" menu

New object

Requirement A project is selected.

Procedure Click on the menu command File > New Object.
The selection for configurable properties appears.
You can find more information on this in the section "Inserting an object (Page 240)".

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

244 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC Manager
11.3 "View" menu

Note
Configuring user diagnostics with the maintenance station
The newly created objects have no communication assignment. This subsequent
communication assignment is not possible.
This configuration allows the user diagnostics with the maintenance station.

Copy
Copy the selected object to the clipboard.

Note
You can only copy objects that have been configured in the process device plant view (objects
with no communication assignment).
Devices that have been configured in the process device network view or in HW Config cannot
be copied.

Paste
Insert the object from the clipboard at the selected point.

Note
You can only insert objects that have been copied in the process device plant view (objects
with no communication assignment).
Requirement:
A project is selected in the "Project" selection box. No objects can be inserted into the
multiproject.

Delete
Deletes the selected object from the process device plant view.

Note
You can only delete objects that have been configured in the process device plant view (objects
with no communication assignment).
Devices that have been configured in the process device network view or in HW Config cannot
be deleted.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 245
Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC Manager
11.3 "View" menu

Rename object
The function for renaming objects is similar to that in the Windows Explorer.

11.3.2.3 "Device" menu

Exporting

This menu command starts the export of device data of a PDM object to an XML file.
Make the settings for the export of device data in the "Export - <object name>" dialog.
If a device is opened twice, for example, by opening the higher-level network and by opening
it directly, this menu command is grayed out in the second window and can only be accessed
in the window that was opened first.

See also
"Export - ..." dialog box (Page 176)

Importing

This menu command starts the import of device data from an XML file to a PDM object.
Make the settings for the import of device data in the "Import - <object name>" dialog.
If a device is opened twice, for example, by opening the higher-level network and by opening
it directly, this menu command is grayed out in the second window and can only be accessed
in the window that was opened first.

See also
"Import - ..." dialog box (Page 180)

Download to device

This menu command writes the parameters shown in the parameter table to the device.
If you are not yet online, SIMATIC PDM makes an online connection at this time.
If a device is opened twice, for example, by opening the higher-level network and by opening
it directly, this menu command is grayed out in the second window and can only be accessed
in the window that was opened first.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

246 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC Manager
11.3 "View" menu

Errors and messages

During the loading, all errors and messages are shown immediately. Any errors occurring in
a device do not cause the entire action to be aborted; they only apply to the device that is
currently being processed. Errors and other messages are saved and can be displayed at a
later time.
Suppressing message dialogs
You can suppress message dialogs during the loading. Select the "Execute 'Load' without info
dialogs" check box. You can find additional information using the Options > SIMATIC PDM >
Settings > The "Load" tab (Page 260) menu command.

Additional information
You can find information on loading FF devices in the PCS 7 FOUNDATION Fieldbus
commissioning manual

See also
"Download to device - ..." dialog box (Page 187)

Upload to PG/PC

This menu command reads the parameters of the device and displays them in the parameter
table.
If you are not yet online, SIMATIC PDM makes an online connection at this time.
If a device is opened twice, for example, by opening the higher-level network and by opening
it directly, this menu command is grayed out in the second window and can only be accessed
in the window that was opened first.

Note
Before uploading to PG/PC from remote I/Os, you need to add a corresponding number of
empty modules below the head module in the configuration.

Errors and messages

During the loading, all errors and messages are shown immediately. Any errors occurring in
a device do not cause the entire action to be aborted; they only apply to the device that is
currently being processed. Errors and other messages are saved and can be displayed at a
later time.
Suppressing message dialogs
You can suppress message dialogs during the loading. Select the "Execute 'Load' without info
dialogs" check box. You can find additional information using the Options > SIMATIC PDM >
Settings > The "Load" tab (Page 260) menu command.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 247
Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC Manager
11.3 "View" menu

Additional information
You can find information on loading FF devices in the PCS 7 FOUNDATION Fieldbus
commissioning manual

See also
"Upload to PG/PC - ..." dialog box (Page 189)

Update diagnostics

SIMATIC PDM attempts to establish an online connection to the object which is currently
selected and to update the status.
If a device is opened twice, for example, by opening the higher-level network and by opening
it directly, this menu item is grayed out in the second window and can only be accessed in the
window that was opened first.

See also
"Update diagnostics - ..." dialog box (Page 219)

Device Selection (Reassign)

This function is used to manually assign a device type and thus an EDD for the selected object.

See also
Creating your own device library using the project filter (Page 53)
Creating your own device library from a collection of device descriptions (Page 54)

Displays general information about the selected object.

This information is stored together with the parameter set.
Depending on the device, some of this information can be transferred to the device, for
example:
● TAG
● Message
● Description
● Address
● ...

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

248 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC Manager
11.3 "View" menu

11.3.2.4 Functions

"Project" selection box

The "Project" selection box organizes the data displayed in the device list:
● Selection of an individual project:
The list shows the devices and data of the project.
● Select a multiproject:
The list shows the devices and data from the entire multiproject.
Click on the "Project" selection box. The "Project" selection box displays all available user
projects. Select individual projects or select "All" to see all the devices included in the selected
projects.

Find
Enter the "string" (word) or partial string in the input box to be used for the search.
● Limit search to a single column of the table
Click on the header in the table. Select the check box for the columns in which for the term
to be searched.
● Find multiple strings
Spaces enable you to filter according to multiple terms in the table columns that are selected
for the search. No wildcards are accepted.
Example:
"SITRANS 00" to find the strings "SITRANS" and "00"
● Change search
Changes the search string.
● Delete search string
If you do not want to limit the search, delete the entries in the input box.

Sorting columns
● Sort
Left-click in table header of a column.
Sorts the table based on this column.
A left-click on a sorted column reverses the sort order in the table based on the clicked
column.
● Limit search to a single column of the table
Click in the table. Open the shortcut menu and select the check box for the columns in
which you want to search for the term.
● Change the order of the columns of the table
Click on the header in the table. Select the column with the header. Hold down the left
button and drag the column to the desired position within the table.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 249
Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC Manager
11.3 "View" menu

Hardware configuration
When an object has been created using HW Config, the "Hardware configuration" application
can be opened.
HW Config analyzes the current configuration and, if possible, highlights the corresponding
object.

PDM parameter view

You have the following options for opening SIMATIC PDM:
● Double-click on the object.
● Select an object
– Press Enter.
– CTRL + ALT + O
– "Open object" shortcut menu
The parameter view of SIMATIC PDM opens.

Show change log

Opens the change log. (See also Show change log (Page 235)")

Specify project-specific write protection

The "Project-specific write protection" function prevents unintentional changes of field device
parameters.

Note
This function is not an absolute write protection against parameter changes in the device. It
only prevents unintentional changes by the user. Depending on the architecture of the DD
devices, DD methods and functions can change the parameters.

An activation stamp is set at the time when the project-specific write protection is activated.
This time stamp is deleted at the time of deactivation.
There are no special access restrictions for setting a project-specific write protection. The
function is usually activated or deactivated for configured field devices by the project
administrator.

Effects of the project-specific write protection

Activation of the project-specific write protection has an effect on the following functionalities:
● The "LoadToDevice" function in the device menu, the maintenance menu as well as in the
online dialogs, all method buttons and the transfer button are locked or deactivated.
● In case of bulk operations, write-protected devices are omitted.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

250 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC Manager
11.3 "View" menu

● Write orders from the device DD cannot be intercepted.

● Pure read operations, such as "LoadToPc", "Diagnostics" or device export as well as display
of process data in measured value dialogs still work.

Procedure
1. Open the plant view.
2. Select the field devices for which you want to set project-specific write protection and those
whose project-specific write protection you wish to revoke.
3. Open the shortcut menu with a right-click.
4. Select the menu item "Project-specific write protection".
The check mark in front of the "Project-specific write protection" menu item either appears
or disappears.
The time stamp in the "Write protection" column either appears or disappears.
The padlock symbol at the respective device symbol appears or disappears.
As soon as write protection changes (activated/deactivated), an entry is made in the PDM
change log.

11.3.3 Operation view

Core statement
The operation view indicates all operations initiated by you.

Opening the operation view

You open the operation view in one of two ways:
● Click "View > Operation View"
● Perform an operation

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 251
Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC Manager
11.3 "View" menu

Structure
The operation view is located below the plant view and shows all operations initiated by you.
You can use the dividing line in the upper area to change the size of the operation view. This
setting is retained the next time the operation view is opened.

Closing the operation view

The upper area of the operation view contains the "X" button. Click this button to close the
operation view. If you would like to close the operation view while operations are being
executed, an error message to that effect appears.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

252 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC Manager
11.3 "View" menu

Controlling the operation view

The operations of the operation view are controlled in the left area. The following two symbols
are used for this.

Symbol Description
The operations are being executed.

The operations have been paused.

Filtering the operation view

You filter the operations of the operation view in the left area. The following four filters are
available:

Status Description
Completed All operations that are completed are displayed.
Error All operations that were finished with an error are displayed.
Warning All operations that were finished with a warning are displayed.
Successful All operations that were finished successfully are displayed.

Status bar
The lower area contains the status bar of the operation view. The results of the operations are
given in the status bar. The following three statuses are possible:

Symbol Description
(x) "x" operations were successfully executed.
(x) "x" operations were finished with a warning.
(x) "x" operations were finished with an error.

Operation list
The area on the right displays the operation list. It shows information on the individual
operations in a table.

Table column: Status

The following statuses exist:

Symbol Status Visible under

The operation was successfully execu‐ Completed, Successful
ted.
Messages and warnings occurred dur‐ Completed, Warning
ing execution of an operation.
The operation was not executed due to Completed, Error
an error.
The operation is currently being pro‐ Completed, Error
cessed elsewhere.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 253
Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC Manager
11.3 "View" menu

Symbol Status Visible under

The operation is waiting to be executed. Active

The operation was not executed. Completed, Successful

The operation is currently being execu‐ Active

ted.

Table column: Object name

The name of the device, the diagnostic information, the status and the project-specific write
protection are displayed.

Table column: Operation type

The following operation types are displayed:

Symbol Operation type

Export

Import

Download to device

Upload to PG/PC

Update diagnostics

Table column: Progress

A progress bar with percentage information appears while an operation is being executed.

Table column: Status message

Messages can occur while an operation is being executed.

Interactions while operations are being executed

It is impossible to completely prevent unwanted interactions from taking place. If this happens,
the respective line in the table of the operation view is marked in orange and a dialog box
appears. Operator control of the plant view and the associated operation view is then disabled
until all dialogs have been closed.

Change log
If you have activated the "Show input dialog for comments in change log" option, a change log
is displayed in the plant view for each operation that you have initiated. The number of devices
selected is irrelevant.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

254 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC Manager
11.3 "View" menu

Export
A dialog box appears for the export. The settings in the dialog apply to all selected devices.
The following settings are available:
● Export directory
● HTML transformation file
● The information to be exported, e.g. device parameters, diagnostics, document manager

Import
A dialog box appears for the import. The settings in the dialog apply to all selected devices.
The following settings are available:
● Import file
● Identification data for the import
● Device parameters for the import

11.3.4 Process devices network view

The process devices network view displays the devices in groups according to the network
topology.
You can configure smaller projects directly in the process devices network view, for example,
for end-to-end connections between a PC and a device in the factory.

Opening the process device network view

1. Select the View > Process device network view menu command in SIMATIC Manager.
The process device network view opens.

See also
"Settings" for the SIMATIC project (Page 85)

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 255
Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC Manager
11.4 "Options" menu

11.4 "Options" menu

You will find the following views in SIMATIC Manager after the installation of SIMATIC PDM:
● Process device plant view
● Process device network view

Project settings
The project settings are made in the SIMATIC Manager. These settings apply to the SIMATIC
project and SIMATIC PDM.
● Language for the menus and dialog boxes
● Default project view
● Display
● Details in the columns
Make the project settings In SIMATIC Manager using the following menu command: Options
> Settings...

Settings Tab Meaning

Language selection "Language" tab Language displayed in the menus and dialog boxes in the SIMATIC
Manager and SIMATIC PDM
Default project view "View" tab Start view for the SIMATIC Manager: Available views of SIMATIC
PDM:
● Process device plant view
● Process device network view
Details in the columns "Columns" tab Views and object types in the parameter table

"Columns" tab
On the "Columns" tab, you can select the columns that you want to be displayed in a PDM
view.
Select an object type in the tree structure. Then go to the "Visible Columns" list and activate
the check boxes for the entries you want to be displayed for the selected object type.
Object types
● Type 1 in the tree structure
– Process device plant view
– Process device network view
● Type 2 in the tree structure
– Process device plant view > Devices
● Type 3
– Process device network view > Networks

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

256 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC Manager
11.4 "Options" menu

● Type 4
– Process device network view > Networks > PC
● Type 5
– Process device network view > Networks > Communication network
– Process device network view > Networks > Communication network > Object(on all
subordinate levels)

Visible columns
Object type Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4 Type 5
Object name Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard
Picture Name For OS Standard - - - -
LID - Standard - - -
(Location identifier denotes the
installation position of a device)
Address - x - Standard Standard
Description Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard
Message Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard
Device status - Standard - - Standard
Last communication - Standard - - Standard
Text1 x x x x x
Text2 x x x x x
Text3 x x x x x
Device - Standard x x Standard
PLT ID* - Standard - - x
Manufacturer - Standard - - Standard
Serial number - x - - x
Installation date - x - - x
Hardware version - x - - x
Software version - x - - x
Article number - x - - x
Object status - Standard - - Standard
DD revision - x - - x
Author x x x x x
Revision date Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard
Comment x x x x x

*Process control ID generated internally by PDM for identification of an object for connections
to the Asset Management System (PCS 7 Maintenance Station and PDM Maintenance
Station).

● Type 6
– Settings for a multiproject

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 257
Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC Manager
11.4 "Options" menu

Process device plant view (multiproject) Process device network view (multiproject)
Object name Standard Standard
Project language Standard Standard
UNC path Standard Standard
Path to "Computer" Standard Standard
Computer Standard Standard
Computer after removal Standard Standard
Path after removal Standard Standard

See also
Settings for SIMATIC PDM (Page 258)
Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC Manager (Page 225)

11.4.1 Settings for SIMATIC PDM

This command opens the "Settings" dialog box.

In this dialog box, you can adapt SIMATIC PDM to your preferences and requirements.

Setting options for SIMATIC PDM

Select the menu command Options > SIMATIC PDM > Settings... .

Settings Tab Notes

Device parameters "General" tab (Page 259) Display of the device parameters
Communication "Communication" tab Settings for communication
(Page 259)
Load procedures The "Load" tab (Page 260) Selection of information for load procedures
Device Integration "Device Integration Manag‐ Settings for the Device Integration Manager
Manager er" tab (Page 261)
Maintenance project "Maintenance Station" tab Settings for the maintenance station project
(Page 262)
PDM clients "PDM clients" tab (Page 263) Allow computers to access to the SIMATIC
PDM Server through a browser
Change log "Change Log" tab Settings for the change log
(Page 264)
Service "Service" tab (Page 264) Settings for expert mode of SIMATIC PDM

See also
"Settings" for the SIMATIC project (Page 85)

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

258 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC Manager
11.4 "Options" menu

11.4.1.1 "General" tab

Purpose
You can set the display of the device parameters in this tab.

Area Field Explanations/operating instructions

Project "Use message as long TAG for HART If this check box is selected, the string stored in the "Message" pa‐
revision < V6" check box rameter is sent as a "Long TAG" for HART devices with a HART revi‐
sion prior to V6.
"Select type when device is inserted in If the check box is selected, the dialog for device type selection ap‐
HW Config" check box pears immediately when you insert a device in HW Config if the device
cannot be assigned explicitly to a device type.
If the check box is cleared, this dialog does not appear until the device
is opened for the first time.
File paths HTML transformation file XSL file that contains the information for display in HTML format.
Path for "Export" files Storage path for files created with the "Export" function.
Path for "Asset export" files Storage path for "Asset export" files
Path for "Document" files Storage path for "Document Manager" files
Path for "Message protocol" files Storage path for "Message protocol" files
Path for "Compare Log" files Path for "Compare Log" files
Path for "Calibration Log" files Storage path for "Calibration Log" files
Path for "Archive" files Storage path for "Archive" files

11.4.1.2 "Communication" tab

Purpose
The following communication settings can be made in this tab:

Field Explanations/operating instructions

Cycle time Updating of the values shown in the "Process value display" dialog box is carried
(default value: 1000 out in accordance with the time interval entered here.
ms) Note: You can change the cycle time value for periodic communication jobs. We
recommend against significantly reducing the cycle time unless absolutely nec‐
essary.
Identity If the "Identity check" check box is selected, SIMATIC PDM performs an identity
check automatically each time there is any online communication.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 259
Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC Manager
11.4 "Options" menu

Field Explanations/operating instructions

Device diagnostics If the "Diagnostics update" check box is selected, SIMATIC PDM performs de‐
vice diagnostics automatically each time there is any online communication.
HART communica‐ If the "SHC mode enabled" option is activated, SIMATIC PDM independently
tion detects for the analog channels of HART remote I/Os whether the SHC function
(uninterrupted HART command sequence) as per the "HART on PROFIBUS"
specification from the "PROFIBUS & PROFINET International (PI)" fieldbus or‐
ganization is supported.
● SIMATIC PDM is able to use SHC mode if the HART module of the remote
I/O supports this mode.
This results in shorter reading and writing times for the parameter data of
HART field devices.
● If the HART module of the remote I/O does not support SHC mode, the
conventional communication method is used instead.
Note:
Communication with HART field devices interrupted:
If communication with individual HART field devices is interrupted repeatedly
when this option is used, you should deactivate it when working with the HART
field devices concerned.

Identity check and device diagnostics

Note
Reduction of times for servicing or loop check
You can reduce the load/read times by up to 20 seconds if you deactivate the identity check
and device diagnostics. You can still use the "Update diagnostics (Page 233)" function for
diagnostics.
During any communication with the field device, identity is checked and the diagnostics is
updated.
You have the option of disabling these functions
Manually updating the diagnostics is still possible

11.4.1.3 The "Load" tab

On the "Load" tab, specify which information you want to be displayed during loading
processes.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

260 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC Manager
11.4 "Options" menu

"Upload to PG/PC" area

Check box Explanations/operating instructions

Save parameter set in project data re‐ Saves the configured parameters even if individual parame‐
gardless of transmission errors. ters could not be loaded from the device.
Save inconsistent parameter sets in Saves the parameters received from the device, even if indi‐
project data vidual parameters have invalid values (for example, range
limit exceeded).
Execute even if the device TAG does not Executes the action even if the device identifiers in the device
match the project data TAG and in the project data differ.

"Download to Device" area

Check box Explanations/operating instructions

Reset changed configuration flag Resets the configuration flag after successfully loading a de‐
vice.
Each change in the configuration of a device sets the config‐
uration flag.
Download inconsistent parameter sets Writes parameter values to the device, even if the values are
to the device. invalid (e.g. range exceeded).
Execute even if the device TAG does Executes the action even if the device identifiers in the device
not match the project data TAG and in the project data differ.

"Execute 'Load' without info dialogs" check box

If this check box is selected, information dialogs are not displayed during download. This setting
applies to all loading processes.

"Exclude passivated FF blocks" check box

If this check box is selected, passivated function blocks are ignored during download.

11.4.1.4 "Device Integration Manager" tab

You can open the configuration dialog for the Device Integration Manager by selecting the
menu command Options > SIMATIC PDM > Settings... in SIMATIC Manager and then opening
the "Device Integration Manager" tab.

Visible columns Displayed information

Status* Status of the device description integration
Path* Catalog path of the devices for which a device description was found
Device name* Device name
Manufacturer* Manufacturer
Communication* Communication type for the connection to the field device
Device class* Hierarchical name of the device type (e.g. flow sensor)
New version* Version of the device description which was read in from a device description library
Integrated version* Version of the device description that is integrated in SIMATIC PDM

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 261
Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC Manager
11.4 "Options" menu

Visible columns Displayed information

Integrated on Date on which a device description was integrated into SIMATIC PDM
Description Descriptive text from the device description
Type ID ID for a device type in hexadecimal format
GSD file Name of the communication description file
New EDD revision Revision of the imported device description
Integrated EDD revision Revision of the integrated device description
New device revision Device revision of the device description that was read from a device description library.
Devices of the associated device type with this device revision can be interpreted in SIMATIC
PDM.
Integrated device revision Device revision of the device description which is integrated in SIMATIC PDM. Devices with
this device revision of the device type can be interpreted in SIMATIC PDM.
Device library Revision of the device description library (EDD library) from which the device description of
the associated device has been read in

* Selected by default
Use the following buttons to speed up the configuration process:
● Select all (select)
● Deselect all
● Reset selection

"Actions during device integration" area

Check box Explanations/operating instructions

Semantic check If this check box is selected, the Device Integration Manger checks
the device description files for semantic errors during the integration
process.

11.4.1.5 "Maintenance Station" tab

Purpose
In this dialog box, you specify the path to the project of a maintenance station for the use of a
maintenance station.

Table 11-4 Maintenance project area

Field Explanations/operating instructions

"Maintenance project" in‐ You can enter the path for the maintenance project in this input box.
put box
"Assign current project" Click this button to use the currently open project as the project for the
button maintenance station.
"Transfer maintenance Select this check box if you want maintenance alarms that are detected by
alarm to MS station" SIMATIC PDM to be sent to the maintenance station. This option must be
check box enabled for integration into the PDM MS.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

262 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC Manager
11.4 "Options" menu

Table 11-5 "Client settings" area

Field Explanations/operating instructions

"Automatic logoff of the Select this check box if the SIMATIC PDM Server idle sessions should log
session when there is no off after a specified time.
activity" check box Enter the time to wait until logoff in the "Time" input box.

"Time" input box You can specify the time after which idle sessions are to be logged off.
Requirement:
The "Automatic logoff portal view in case of inactivity" check box is selected.

Additional information
You can find information on working with the maintenance station in the configuration manual
titled Process Control System PCS 7 Operator Station.

11.4.1.6 "PDM clients" tab

You can allow computers to access to the SIMATIC PDM Server through a browser in the
"PDM clients" tab.
The number of computers is limited by the number of available PDM clients.

"License information" display area

Note
Insufficient licenses available
If there are not enough licenses, you need to release clients.
To release a client, clear the check box for the client that you want to release.

The "License Information" display area shows you the number of currently active PDM
sessions via a browser and the number of licensed PDM clients.

Access table in the "PDM Clients" tab

Column Function
Network share If you select the check box for a client (x), the computer with the IP address specified
in the line is allowed to access the SIMATIC PDM Server.
IP address Select the "Network share" check box and enter the IP address of a computer to
be authorized to access the SIMATIC PDM Server.
Comment Enter a plant-specific comment (e.g. name of the computer in the plant).

● "Enable all possible clients" button

Activates all available PDM client licenses.
● "Disable all clients"
Blocks access to the SIMATIC PDM Server.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 263
Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC Manager
11.4 "Options" menu

Releasing licenses
To release a client, click on the selected check box of the client.
The IP address and the comment of the client is retained. You do not have to enter the
information again the next time you use the client. The updated license information is displayed
in the License Information section.

11.4.1.7 "Change Log" tab

"Enable change log" check box

When this check box is selected, a log file is created when changes are made in SIMATIC
PDM.

"Automatic Archiving" area

Drop-down list Explanations/operating instructions

Off Disables automatic archiving of the log file.
By interval Archives the log file in a particular cycle (yearly, monthly, weekly).
By limit value or memory size Archives the log file once it has reached a particular memory size.

"Show input dialog for comments in change log" check box

If this check box is activated, the "Change log comment on process" dialog opens when
changes are entered. You can enter comments in the entry dialog.

11.4.1.8 "Service" tab

Service options for EDD developers are activated in this dialog box. A "Debug log" is created
if you activate options.

Recommendation:
Activate the service options for EDD developers only if instructed by the hotline to do so.

Trace mode

Field Explanations/operating instructions

User If this check box is selected, user actions are logged.
Errors If this check box is selected, a log is started when an error occurs. After
the first error message appears, all further error messages are listed.
Warning If this check box is selected, a log is started when a warning occurs.
After the first error message or warning appears, all further error mes‐
sages or warnings are listed.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

264 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC Manager
11.4 "Options" menu

Field Explanations/operating instructions

Communication If this check box is selected, a log is started. After the first error mes‐
sage or warning appears, all further error messages or warnings are
listed. In the "Communication" tab, you can specify what types of notes
are recorded in the communication log.
Detail If this check box is selected, a log is started when SIMATIC PDM starts.
After the first message appears, all messages, warnings, and errors
are listed.
EDD Expert mode - Activate messages for analyzing device descriptions
Object Manager Expert mode - Activate specific system messages for analysis

Trace Level

Field Explanations/operating instructions

Details If this check box is selected, a log is started when SIMATIC PDM
starts. After the first message appears, all messages, warnings, and
errors are listed.
Warnings If this check box is selected, a log is started when a warning occurs.
After the first error message or warning appears, all further error mes‐
sages or warnings are listed.
Errors If this check box is selected, a log is started when an error occurs.
After the first error message appears, all further error messages are
listed.
Nothing Deactivates expert mode for Trace level

Trace Function Type

The expert options for the errors are activated in this dialog box.
We recommend that you only enable logging when the Hotline instructs you to do so.

Tools for EDD development

Field Explanations/operating instructions

Displaying EDD IDs If this check box is selected, the parameter table shows the variable
IDs of the EDD.
Open online dialogs offline If this check box is selected and there is no connection with the device,
no error message pertaining to the connection status will be output;
the online dialog will open instead. The values displayed are those
saved in the project or the EDD.

11.4.2 Role management

Opens the "SIMATIC Logon Role Management" dialog box.

SIMATIC Logon Role Management is the SIMATIC Logon component used to create roles
and assign Windows groups and users as well as operational permissions to the roles.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 265
Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC Manager
11.4 "Options" menu

Role management is used to regulate access to applications and functions by users and
groups.
Access protection forces users to log on to the system if they want to use an application or
function.
By default in SIMATIC PDM, no roles are administered, which means there is no user assigned
to a role. In order to manage roles in SIMATIC Logon, the user must be in the Windows group
"Logon_Administrator".

Function rights and roles

You can create new roles yourself and provide them with function rights. Function rights allow
access to specific SIMATIC PDM functions. These pre-defined function rights are preset by
the software and cannot be changed or deleted.
It is not possible to create new function rights.

Function rights in SIMATIC PDM:

● Access to the command interface
● "Parameter View" menu command
● "Device" menu command
● "View" menu command
● "Diagnostics" menu command
● "Service" menu command
● "Write to device" menu command
● "Read from device" menu command
● "Save" menu command
● Online access to the device: Allows communication with the device

Predefined roles
The predefined roles "PDM CI" and "Service user" are created for SIMATIC PDM. The
predefined roles can neither be changed nor deleted.

Role: PDM CI
The "PDM command interface" role controls access of an application to the PDM command
interface. The application also reports the administered Windows user.
After a successful password check and check of role membership, the application is allowed
access to PDM via the command interface.

Role: Service user

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

266 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC Manager
11.4 "Options" menu

The role "Service user" allows access to the following menu commands and functions:
● "Parameter View" menu command
● "Device" menu command
● "View" menu command
● "Diagnostics" menu command
● "Service" menu command
● "Write to device" menu command
● "Read from device" menu command
● "Save" menu command
● Online access to the device: Allows communication with the device
● Access to a SIMATIC PDM Server

Note
Using a maintenance station
The Windows user using the ASSET must be a member of the "SIMATIC HMI" Windows group.

11.4.3 HART server

Opens the HART server application.

You can use SIMATIC PDM to configure HART devices for the following networks:
● Multiplexer networks
– Multiplexer network with panel (for example, MTL multiplexer)
– Multiplexer network without panel (for example, P+F multiplexer)
● Wireless HART gateway
– You configure a wireless HART gateway as a HART multiplexer.
You need a HART server application in the project to integrate and manage these networks.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 267
Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC Manager
11.4 "Options" menu

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

268 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
SIMATIC PDM Server option 12
12.1 Setting up the SIMATIC PDM Server
The SIMATIC PDM Server add-on includes:
● A SIMATIC PDM Server provides interactive websites to the user interface of SIMATIC
PDM.
● The SIMATIC PDM portal is the interactive home page of the SIMATIC PDM Server.

Restrictions
Each session via a browser requires active connections to the SIMATIC PDM Server.
The maximum number of concurrent connections depends on the following:
● Permissible number of connections from the browser of the computer accessing the
SIMATIC PDM Server.
● Permissible number of connections of the operating system of the SIMATIC PDM Server.
Ensure that the permissible number of simultaneous active connections is not exceeded.
Messages:
● Session limit reached
If the server limit has been reached, you see the message "Session limit reached".
● Connection error
If the client limit has been reached, you see the message "Connection error".

NOTICE
Number of permissible active connections exceeded
The maximum number of concurrent sessions is limited.
● Exceeding this number results in a short-term blockade of all logged-on users.
● At the same time, a new user who exceeds this number cannot log on.

NOTICE
Limited functionality
For use of the HART Server functionality, you must be logged onto the SIMATIC PDM Server
locally.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 269
SIMATIC PDM Server option
12.1 Setting up the SIMATIC PDM Server

Requirements
The following requirements must be fulfilled to operate SIMATIC PDM Server add-on:
● Microsoft Internet Information Server (IIS) with ASP.NET support must be enabled
You can find information on this in the next section.
● SIMATIC PDM Server Configurator has been run.
You use the configuration tool to activate the options of the SIMATIC PDM Server on the
Internet Information Server.
You can find information on the Server Configurator in the section "SIMATIC PDM Server
Configurator (Page 273)".
● The port is entered in the Windows Firewall, which has been registered and enabled in the
SIMATIC PDM Server Configurator. You need administrator rights to make this setting.
SIMATIC PDM sets the firewall rule during its installation.
If you use a different firewall, set these rules there and enable them.
● A maintenance project must be configured in SIMATIC Manager
You can find information on this in the section ""Maintenance Station" tab (Page 262)".
● All Windows users who want to access the SIMATIC PDM Server are authorized for access.
You can find information on this in the section "Role management (Page 265) ".
● SIMATIC PDM Web Server on a Windows Server
If SIMATIC PDM is to be opened from a faceplate, the following conditions must be met:
– The server is added to the list of "Trusted sites".
– Under "Internet options" in the "Advanced" tab of the in Internet Explorer, "Play
animations in webpages" option must be enabled.
● SIMATIC PDM Web client on a Windows Server
– The server must be registered in the list of "Trusted Sites".
● If you are using a Windows installation with IIS 8.5 or later, you also have to activate the
Web sockets.
● If computers are to access the SIMATIC PDM Server using a browser, they must be
registered in the list of PDM clients.
You can find information on this in the section ""PDM clients" tab (Page 263)".

Enabling Microsoft Internet Information Server (IIS) with ASP.NET support

Note
Compatibility with respect to operating system and ASP.NET
If you are using Windows 10 or Windows Server 2016, additional check boxes are available:
● .NET Extensibility 4.6
● ASP .NET 4.6
The PDM Server does not check to determine whether .NET Extensibility 3.5/4.6 is enabled.
To use ASP .NET 3.5/4.6, enable .NET Extensibility 3.5/4.6.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

270 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 SIMATIC PDM Server option
12.1 Setting up the SIMATIC PDM Server

To enable the Microsoft Internet Information Server with ASP.NET support, proceed as follows
(example with Windows 7):
1. Open the Windows Control Panel.
2. Navigate to "Programs and Features" > "Turn Windows features on and off".
The "Windows Features" dialog box opens.
3. Navigate through the tree structure to "Internet Information Services" and select the
corresponding check box.
If the check box is already selected, you can activate it again.
4. Navigate to "Internet Information Services" > "Management tools".
5. Select the "IIS Management Console" check box.
6. Navigate to "Internet Information Services" > "World Wide Web Services" > "Application
Development Features".
7. Select the "ASP.NET" check box.
8. Navigate to "Internet Information Services" > "Common HTTP Features".

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 271
SIMATIC PDM Server option
12.1 Setting up the SIMATIC PDM Server

9. Select the "Static Content" check box.

10.Close the window with "OK".

The Microsoft Internet Information Server with ASP.NET support is now enabled.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

272 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 SIMATIC PDM Server option
12.2 SIMATIC PDM Server Configurator

12.2 SIMATIC PDM Server Configurator

The SIMATIC PDM Server Configurator is an application on the SIMATIC PDM Server.
You can use the configuration tool to make settings for the communication of the SIMATIC
PDM Server.
The communication of the SIMATIC PDM Server must be configured once before the initial
start.

Opening the configuration tool

In the Windows Start menu, select the command Programs > Siemens Automation > SIMATIC
> SIMATIC PDM > PDM Server Configuration.
The "SIMATIC PDM Server Configuration Tool" dialog window opens.

"SIMATIC PDM - Server configuration tool" dialog window

The following tabs may appear in the "SIMATIC PDM Server Configuration Tool" dialog window
depending on the installed add-ons:

Installed option Tabs

SIMATIC PDM Server "PDM server" tab
SIMATIC PDM Command Service "Command interface server" tab

"PDM server" tab

Note
All data are sent via an unsecured connection for HTTP access.
Transmission of data over a secure connection requires the following:
● A trusted server certificate is selected.
● Access is made via HTTPS.

Area Field Description

General informa‐ Website name Name of the website
tion The default name usually only has to be changed if there is
a conflict with another server program.
Physical path The files required to display SIMATIC PDM in a browser are
located in this path.
Connection settings

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 273
SIMATIC PDM Server option
12.2 SIMATIC PDM Server Configurator

Area Field Description

Connection "Certificate" input Certificate for the HTTPS connection
box A certificate is only required if a browser on the SIMATIC
PDM Server is to have access via secure communication
(HTTPS connection).
Requirements for the certificate:
● The certificate must be a computer certificate.
● The certificate must have a corresponding private key. It
must be located within the LocalMachine/Personal of the
Windows Certificate Store container.
● The certificate has a key encryption for key usage and
server authentication for extended key usage.
● The certificate has not expired.
You can find information about importing certificates in the
Microsoft Knowledge Base.
"IP connection (op‐ Fixed link to a network adapter or IP address
tional):"
input box
Ports "Secure connec‐ ● If the check box is selected, a secure connection is
tion" check box established via HTTPS.
● If the check box is not selected, a connection is
established via HTTP.
"Port http" Port via which SIMATIC PDM Server can be reached via the
input box unencrypted HTTP protocol
The default port only needs to be changed if there is a conflict
with another program.
"Port https" Port via which SIMATIC PDM Server can be reached via the
input box encrypted HTTPS protocol
The default port only needs to be changed if there is a conflict
with another program.
Check box "Auto-start website" If the check box is selected, SIMATIC PDM Server is ready
for access via a browser.
Clear the check box if you want to deny access to a browser.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

274 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 SIMATIC PDM Server option
12.2 SIMATIC PDM Server Configurator

"Command interface server" tab

The certificates are required for encrypting the data.

Area Field Description

Certificate man‐ List List of available certificates
agement "Import..." button A certificate is required only if you want to encrypt the com‐
munication.
● Open the "Import" dialog window.
Select the path and a certificate file
(file type: *.pem).
● Click "OK".
The certificate is checked and imported.
The list is then updated.
"Remove" button Deletes a certificate selected in the list
"Details" button Displays information about the certificate.
Connection settings
Server certificate "Certificate file" Displays existing certificate files.
drop-down list Select the desired certificate file.
"Private key file" Displays existing private key files.
drop-down list Select the desired private key file.
Port settings "Port" input box Port via which SIMATIC PDM Server can be reached.
The default port only needs to be changed if there is a conflict
with another program.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 275
SIMATIC PDM Server option
12.3 SIMATIC PDM Portal

12.3 SIMATIC PDM Portal

The SIMATIC PDM portal is the interactive home page of the SIMATIC PDM Server.
After logging on to SIMATIC PDM Portal, you can view all projects and subprojects in the
browser and change field devices.

IE11/Chrome must be used as browser on the SIMATIC PDM Web client. SIMATIC software
is not required on the PDM client.

Note
For the secure operation of SIMATIC PDM, it is necessary to take suitable preventive action
and integrate the PDM client into a holistic industrial security concept. For more information
about industrial security, please visit http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity (http://
www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

276 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 SIMATIC PDM Server option
12.4 Logging on to the SIMATIC PDM Portal

12.4 Logging on to the SIMATIC PDM Portal

The SIMATIC PDM portal is the interactive home page of the SIMATIC PDM Server.
After logging on to SIMATIC PDM Portal, you can view all projects and subprojects in the
browser and change field devices.

Requirement
● For the computers that want to connect to the SIMATIC PDM Server through a browser,
the following shall apply:
– A unique, static IP address is assigned to the computer.
– The IP address is registered in the settings of the SIMATIC PDM Server.
● The IP address for the router (gateway) is registered in the settings of the SIMATIC PDM
Server.
● The computers which are accessed using a browser on a SIMATIC PDM Server are
licensed.
– The number of computers concurrently accessing the SIMATIC PDM Server
corresponds to a maximum licensed number.
Number of used and available licenses:
You can find information on this in the SIMATIC Manager in the menu Options >
Settings in ""PDM clients" tab (Page 263)".
● The users are assigned function rights and roles for SIMATIC PDM (see "Role
management (Page 265)"):
– Service technician
– Plant-specific defined roles

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 277
SIMATIC PDM Server option
12.4 Logging on to the SIMATIC PDM Portal

Opening the SIMATIC PDM Portal

1. Open an browser.
2. Enter the URL of the SIMATIC PDM Server in the "Address" input box and confirm the entry.
The browser connects you to the "SIMATIC PDM Logon" dialog box.
Note
Error messages during logon attempt
If you want to use a browser to access the SIMATIC PDM Server, error pages with
information about the error may be displayed.
Typical errors are:
● The licensing is not sufficient.
● The IP address of the computer is not registered on SIMATIC PDM Server (access to
IP address xyz not allowed).

Note
Checking certificates
SIMATIC PDM automatically checks the validity of certificates when opening the
applications. Some tests require specific network access e.g. URLs that are located in the
local network or the Internet. If these network addresses are not reached, there may be
delays. You can find information on this in http://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/de/
view/87057037.

3. If the display language does not match your operating language, select a different language
by selecting a national flag.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

278 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 SIMATIC PDM Server option
12.4 Logging on to the SIMATIC PDM Portal

4. Specify your domain, user name and password in the text boxes and confirm the entries.

Domain Specify a Windows domain, a logon computer with installed SI‐

MATIC Logon (workgroup mode) or the local computer of the
user who wants to log on to SIMATIC PDM Portal.
"." is allowed for the local computer.
User name Enter your Windows user name.
Password Enter your Windows password.
"Remember me next time" If you select this check box, your logon data is saved for the next
check box access.

5. The browser connects you to the SIMATIC PDM Portal and shows the contents of the
maintenance project.

See also
"SIMATIC PDM Portal" main window (Page 280)

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 279
SIMATIC PDM Server option
12.5 "SIMATIC PDM Portal" main window

12.5 "SIMATIC PDM Portal" main window

The SIMATIC PDM Portal has the following layout

"Project information" area "User information" area
The "Project information" area shows the project currently Displays information about the user:
running in SIMATIC PDM, and a filter area. ● User: Logged-on user
The settings in the "Filter" reduce the information displayed ● Role: Functional role of the user (e.g. administrator;
in the device list.
service technician, etc.)
● If the currently active project in SIMATIC PDM is a
● Function rights: The list contains the actions that user can
multiproject, you can limit the information displayed by
perform based on selected check boxes:
selecting a subproject.
– "Parameter view" menu command
● "Show devices" button: Shows all signal modules,
interface modules and link modules. – "Device" menu command
The DP/PA link is not displayed. – "View" menu command
The display is reset the next time the portal is opened. – "Diagnostics" menu command
● If you enter a character string in the "Tag" input box, the – "Service" menu command
information displayed is limited to the rows containing this
– "Write to device" menu command
character string.
– "Read from device" menu command
● "Magnifying glass" button: Refreshes the device list.
– Online access to device
● "X" button: Deletes the settings in the "Filter" are and
refreshes the device list. – "Save" menu command
● "Logoff" button:
Used for logging off from the SIMATIC PDM Server
Automatic logoff of the session following inactivity is
possible. You can find information on this in section
""Maintenance Station" tab (Page 262)".
Device list
Displays a list of devices that is selected by the settings in the "Project information" area.
The list has the following columns:
● Tag: PDM object
● Connection point: Path to AS
● Project: Assignment to multiproject / project / AS
● Last change: Time of change
● Priority: See section ""General" tab (Page 195)"
Status bar
Displays the number of devices that is selected by the settings in the "Project information" area.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

280 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 SIMATIC PDM Server option
12.6 Edit field device in SIMATIC PDM via the browser view

12.6 Edit field device in SIMATIC PDM via the browser view

Requirements
● The SIMATIC PDM Portal is open.
● The user has been granted the function rights that are required for the action.
You can find information on this in the section ""SIMATIC PDM Portal" main window
(Page 280)"; subheading "User information"; "Function rights".

Procedure
1. Select the desired device in the "Tag" column of the device list.
2. Select the desire command in the shortcut menu.

Menu command Function

Open Opens the browser view of SIMATIC PDM for the desired device.
You can find more information on this in the section "Menus and dialog
boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the browser view (Page 282)".
Object properties Opens the "Device Selection (Reassign) (Page 248)" dialog box for the
desired device.
Device Selection (Reas‐ Opens the "Device selection (Reassign) (Page 233)" dialog box for the
sign) desired device.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 281
SIMATIC PDM Server option
12.7 Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the browser view

12.7 Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the browser view

12.7.1 "File" menu

You can find the following commands in the "File" menu in the browser view of SIMATIC PDM:
● Save (Page 175)
● Exporting (Page 230)
● Importing (Page 231)
● Print (Page 183)
● Exit (Page 183)

12.7.2 "Device" menu

You can find the following commands in the "Device" menu in the browser view of SIMATIC
PDM:
● Download to device (Page 186)
● Upload to PG/PC (Page 188)
● Assign address and TAG (Page 190)
● Device Selection (Reassign) (Page 248)
● Calibration log ... (Page 199)
● Change log ... (Page 235)
● Check configuration
● Templates

12.7.3 "View" menu

You can find the following commands in the "View" menu in the browser view of SIMATIC PDM:
● Process variables (Page 215)
● Start LifeList (Page 233)
Export of the LifeList data is not available in the browser view of SIMATIC PDM.

12.7.4 "Diagnostics" menu

You can find the following commands in the "Diagnostics" menu in the browser view of
SIMATIC PDM:
● Update diagnostics (Page 219)

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

282 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 SIMATIC PDM Server option
12.7 Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the browser view

12.7.5 "Help" menu

You can find the following commands in the "Help" menu in the browser view of SIMATIC PDM:
● Contents... (Page 222)
● Help for device parameters... (Page 222)
● Info... (Page 222)
● Find (Page 222)
● Document Manager (Page 222)

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 283
SIMATIC PDM Server option
12.7 Menus and dialog boxes for SIMATIC PDM in the browser view

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

284 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
Notes, Tips & Tricks 13
13.1 Information on configuration and parameter assignment
This section contains notes that provide additional information in particular cases. You should
also read the information in the file pdmbase-readme. This file is usually available in the folder ...
\Siemens\SIMATIC_PDM.

Bus parameters
For information on specific settings for the bus parameters made in the Set PG/PC Interface
program, you need to read the pdmbase-readme file.

PROFIBUS PA profile devices

Using profile parameter assignment (profile EDD)

The following procedure applies to profile devices for which there is no EDD in the device
description catalog and for which you want to use your own device-specific GSD file (device
master file):
1. Import the device-specific GSD file required for the master configuration.
Following the import, you can find the device-specific GSD file for the field device in the
hardware catalog under .. \ Additional field devices.
2. Place the field device in the DP/PA master system.
3. Assign a suitable profile device description (EDD) to the field device.
You can find information on this in the section "Device selection (Reassign) (Page 233)".

Using profile communication (profile GSD)

The following procedure applies to profile devices for which a profile GSD file and a custom
device-specific device description (EDD) are to be used for parameter assignment:
1. Place the profile GSD file required for the master configuration in the DP/PA master system.
2. Assign a suitable device description to the field device.
You can find information on this in the section "Device selection (Reassign) (Page 233)".

Block configuration of HART devices

HART devices are configured using general parameters and parameters that are assigned to
blocks. For example, some pressure transmitters can measure the temperature as well. For
such a device, you set the number of blocks and the number of inputs/outputs to two each.
SIMATIC PDM supports devices having up to six blocks. The number of inputs/outputs is
limited to a maximum of four by the HART definition. The online dialog of the Block
assignment can be used to assign I/O to the blocks. This online dialog box is only supported
by devices that allow inputs/outputs to be assigned to blocks.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 285
Notes, Tips & Tricks
13.1 Information on configuration and parameter assignment

Basic configuration of HART devices

The basic configuration of HART devices (in the "SIMATIC PDM Device Selection" dialog box
under HART > Universal > Standard) includes the range of functions that are defined by HFC
in the Universal Commands and the Common Practice Commands.

Setting the time format in a system

Ensure you set the same time format (12 hour format / 24 hour format) for all programs and
devices.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

286 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Notes, Tips & Tricks
13.2 Connecting field devices by means of Industrial Ethernet

13.2 Connecting field devices by means of Industrial Ethernet

Difference between routing and data record routing

"Routing" refers to the transmission of data beyond network boundaries. A transmitter sends
information across network boundaries to a receiver. Particular equipment engineering is
required for this function to work.
Data record routing is a routing function which is used exclusively by SIMATIC PDM . Only
S7-400 CPU modules with a firmware version of V5.1 or higher meet the requirements.
Appropriate interfaces could be internal CPU interfaces, communication processors (e.g., CP
443-5 EXT) or external equipment (e.g., IE/PB-Link). You can find information on the suitability
of modules in the associated operating instructions.
Data sent by means of data record routing can include the following:
● Parameter assignments of the communication devices concerned
● Device-specific information (e.g., setpoints, limits, or similar)
With data record routing, the structure of the destination address depends on the contents of
the data, i.e., on the device for which the data is intended. The field devices themselves do
not have to support data record routing, since these devices do not forward the information
they receive.

IE/PB-Link in connection with S7 stations

You need an IE/PB-Link to go establish a connection via Ethernet to a DP device at an S7-300
or at the internal DP interface of S7‑400 up to firmware V5.1 . The link provides the data record
gateway for the plant. An IE/PB-Link must be created for each DP line in the project.
To commission the IE/PB-Link , you must assign an IP address to the link. To do this, you
connect the IE/PB-Link with the Engineering Station via Ethernet.
● The IE/PB-Link PN IO is supplied with a fixed MAC address. If not configured, the IE/PB-
Link PN IO is accessible via this MAC address (requires Ethernet port).
● An IP address is automatically assigned during the configuration process. This IP address
is later transferred to the IE/PB-Link PN IO (IO device) when the PROFINET IO controller
starts up.
● You assign a device name to the IE/PB-Link PN IO so that the IO controller is able to
identify the IO device during this process. In the SIMATIC Manager or in HW Config, select
the menu command Target system > Edit Ethernet nodes... .
(You can find detailed information on the procedure in the online help for STEP 7.)

Requirement
For the SIMATIC project, an IE/PB-Link is created in a SIMATIC 300 station.
(Hardware catalog under "SIMATIC 300 > Gateway > IE/PB Link PN IO)

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 287
Notes, Tips & Tricks
13.2 Connecting field devices by means of Industrial Ethernet

Procedure
1. In SIMATIC Manager, select the menu command PLC > Edit Ethernet Node....
The "Edit Ethernet Node" dialog box opens.
2. Enter the MAC address of the IE/PB-Link in the "Ethernet node" section or click the
"Browse..." button to search for and select the IE/PB-Link.
3. Assign the corresponding IP parameters to the IE/PB-Link.
4. Open HW Config.
5. Parameterize the Ethernet connection and the DP interface with the values that apply to
the project.
6. On the "Operating Mode" tab, select the "No DP" check box. The IE/PB-Link now operates
like a PG/PC.
7. Once you have configured and programmed all stations, start NetPro and select the
Network > Save and Compile menu command in order to generate all routing tables.
8. To communicate via Ethernet, you select the TCP/IP protocol in the programming device/
PC interface settings for the CP 1613 or other network card that will be used for
communication.
9. Create another programming device/PC parallel to the stations in the component view, and
configure an Ethernet interface in this programming device/PC.
10.Assign this interface to the interface configured under the programming device/PC interface.
Now when you open the hardware configuration for a SIMATIC 300 station, communication to
the devices will also function via Ethernet.

IE/PB-Link in connection with third-party systems

In order to be able to use systems made by third-party manufacturers, you will have to configure
a SIMATIC 300 or SIMATIC 400 station as a "dummy" station. For this purpose, a simple
configuration consisting of a rack, PS, CPU and DP interface will be sufficient. The devices
will then be distributed on the DP lines of this station just as they are connected to the third-
party masters.
Select the DP settings on the third-party master so that the token routing is performed through
two masters (the third-party master and the IE/PB-Link).
Like in an S7 plant, one IE/PB-Link per DP line is also required here.
The same settings as for STEP 7 stations apply for establishing communication. You need a
programming device/PC with an Ethernet interface.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

288 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Notes, Tips & Tricks
13.3 HART applications

13.3 HART applications

System environment
Implementation of intelligent field devices with HART functionality requires the following system
environment (see the figure below):
● Current loop 4 - 20 mA
● HART configuration tool:
The HART parameters can be set using an external handheld panel (HART Handheld) or
a HART configuration tool (SIMATIC PDM). The configuration tool deploys the HART
analog module, whereas the HART Handheld is connected directly in parallel to the field
device.
● HART system integration:
The HART analog module assumes a "master" function by receiving the commands from
the HART configuration tool. It then transfers these commands to the intelligent field device
and returns corresponding response frames. The interface of the HART analog module is
formed by data records which are transferred via the I/O bus. The HART configuration tool
must generate and interpret the data records.
● IM153-2 head-end station for the HART configuration tool:
Head-end station for PROFIBUS DP, which supports master class 1 and master class 2
functionality.
)LHOGGHYLFHZLWK+$57IXQFWLRQDOLW\ +$57DQDORJPRGXOH

&RQQHFWLRQWR
P$ 352),%86

+$57UHVLVWRU
/9
6,0$7,&
3'0
0RGHP
)LOWHULQJRI+$57
VLJQDO
+$57KDQGKHOG $'& +$57SDUDPHWHUDVVLJQPHQWWRRO
$QDORJGLJLWDOFRQYHUVLRQ
RIF\FOLF
PHDVXUHGYDOXH
0*URXQG

Figure 13-1 System environment: Use of HART

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 289
Notes, Tips & Tricks
13.3 HART applications

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

290 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
Appendix A
A.1 Communication Problems
If communication problems occur, you should check for the following:

Connecting
● Configuration
– Is the programming device or PC interface configured correctly? The SIMATIC Manager
menu command Options > Set PG/PC Interface or the Windows Control Panel can be
used to set the PG/PC interface parameters.
– If you are not performing configuration in HW Config: Is the correct interface assigned
to the PC? Is this interface assigned to the correct network? Check the assignment by
selecting the interface and the required network with the menu command Edit > Object
Properties in the "Communication" tab.
– In case of routing: Is a programming device/PC included in the project in the component
view? Is the correct interface assigned to the programming device/PC?
– Are the addresses (address, slot, channel) assigned correctly and uniquely in the
project?
● Hardware structure
– Is the system complete and has it been cabled correctly? Are all the connectors plugged
in correctly? Are the modules inserted correctly?
– Are all the modules and devices of the plant supplied correctly?
– Are there low-or high-frequency interference in the system? Is the system subject to the
influence of electromagnetic fields?
– Is there a short circuit on the bus or a wire break in a wire leading to the device?
● Addressing the devices
– Are the addresses (address, slot, channel) set correctly for the devices in the system?
– Do the addresses set on the devices agree with the configured addresses?
The address settings are made on the devices via parameter assignments, hardware
switches, or a combination of both.
The device address can be set by means of SIMATIC PDM for some field devices
(PROFIBUS DP/PA and FF). You can find additional information on this in the section
"Delivery contents (Page 29)".

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 291
Appendix
A.1 Communication Problems

● Consistent project engineering and configuration in the CPU and CP

– The project engineering settings loaded to the CPU or to a CP must match the
configuration. The routing tables for the project/multiproject must have been created
and all components loaded in the network configuration (NetPro).
To load the configuration to the CPU or to a CP, select the HW Config menu command
Target system > Download to module > Target module.
● Maximum number of connections
– Devices or communication components can only manage a restricted number of open
connections. It is therefore possible that connections cannot be established. To open
new connections to devices, close S7 applications. For information on the maximum
number of connections permitted, refer to the respective device manuals.
– At least two connections must be supported simultaneously for remote I/Os to enable
communication with the connected HART devices.

Communication Errors
Communication errors can occur when using standard device descriptions, for example, HART
Universal Standard descriptions.
● The reason for this may be an unsuitable device assignment. If this is the case, assign a
suitable device in the network or plant view.
You can find additional information on this in the following sections:
– Section "Delivery contents (Page 29)"
– Section "Replacing devices (Page 121)"
● Another reason may be that the device does not fulfill or fully implement the standard.
Contact the device manufacturer in this case.

Broken Connection
● Reset functions
– Was a reset function triggered in the device? A reset can be triggered manually or by
the firmware of the device (for example, in case of hardware errors or incorrect program
execution). The reset can block the device in a defined "safe" operating state or trigger
a restart of the program with initial settings. These initial settings can differ from the
desired settings, for example, different address or transmission rate.
● Disturbances
– Do low-or high-frequency interference occur in the system or is the plant subject to the
influence of electromagnetic fields? Has the power supply of the system, of parts of the
system or of devices been disconnected? Have connectors been withdrawn or plugged
in elsewhere?
Note
If any other communication problems occur, contact the device manufacturer.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

292 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Appendix
A.2 Message window

A.2 Message window

A.2.1 "Decision on error" dialog box

You can obtain the specific information you need from the dialog box; if necessary, contact
the hotline.

A.2.2 "Error history" dialog box

You can obtain the specific information you need from the dialog box; if necessary, contact
the hotline.

A.2.3 "Error" dialog box

You can obtain the specific information you need from the dialog box; if necessary, contact
the hotline.

A.2.4 "Multiple errors" dialog box

You can obtain the specific information you need from the dialog box; if necessary, contact
the hotline.

A.2.5 "Messages" Dialog Box

Purpose
Messages about the following points are displayed in this dialog box.
● Communication problems
● Export/import
● DIM
● Device descriptions
You can obtain the specific information you need from the dialog box; if necessary, contact
the hotline.

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 293
Appendix
A.2 Message window

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

294 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
Index
Change
Download, 129
" Change log
Add entry, 208
"Communication" Tab ("Settings" dialog box), 259
Archive, 208
"Device" LifeList menu
Load archive, 208
Assign address and TAG, 151
Print, 209
Properties, 153
Close (File menu)
Reassign, 153, 248
Calibration log, 201
Update diagnostics, 151
Change log, 150, 209
"Device" Tab ("Properties" dialog box), 196, 227
LifeList, 150, 209
"Diagnostics" Tab ("Properties" dialog box), 196, 227
Communication, 143
"Edit" LifeList menu
Secure, 143
Start Scan, 151
Complete device information, 57, 58
Start Scan with diagnostics, 151
Configuring, 92
Start Update diagnostics, 151
Networks and devices, 23
Stop, 151
SIMATIC PDM Server, 273
"File" LifeList menu
Connection Editor
Export, 150
Starting, 125
"General" tab ("Properties" dialog box), 195, 226
Contents (Help menu), 65, 222
"Help" LifeList menu, 153
Change log, 210
Info, 154
"Import" dialog box, 180
"Insert SIMATIC PDM Object(s)" dialog box, 240
"Maintenance Station" Tab, 262
D
"Messages" dialog box, 293 Delete (File menu), 60
"Table" Tab ("Settings" dialog box), 259 Device description
"Value Comparison" dialog box, 193 Completing, 52
"View" LifeList menu Integrating, 51
Messages, 153 Removing, 55
Device description file
EDD, 19
A Device description files
Compiling, 262
About... (Help menu), 66, 202, 222
Device integration
Change log, 210
Compile EDD, 262
Add-ons for SIMATIC PDM, 27
Compiling device description files, 262
ASSET
Semantics, 262
Activating service, 171
Settings, 262
Permissions, 171
Device Integration Manager
Starting service, 172
Configuring, 261
Asset service
Settings, 261
Several PCS 7 projects, 172
Device libraries, 29
Device library
Creating, 53, 54
C Device menu, 186, 188, 191, 231, 232, 246, 247
Calibration log, 199 Devices, 97, 117
Print, 201 Integration in HW Config, 97, 117
Saving, 201 Read in number, 48
Diagnostic information, 139

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 295
Index

Diagnostics, 139
Dialogs, 81
Display H
Process values, 215
Hardware
Display process values, 215
Configuring, 83
Download, 128
HART modem network, 23
Downloading changes, 129
HART multiplexer network, 23
Download to devices (Device menu), 186, 231, 246
HART server network, 23
Downloading changes, 129
Help
Trends, 168
Help menu, 65, 66, 222
E Help on device parameters (Help menu), 222
EDD Help topics (Help menu, 202
Device description file, 19 HW Config, 97, 117
Editor Download to devices, 186, 231, 246
Access, 83 Exporting, 175, 230, 246
Exit (File menu), 60, 183 Importing, 179, 231, 246
Export Integrating Devices, 97, 117
Parameter export, 132 Start Connection Editor, 125
Structure export, 133 Synchronizing, 236
Export file Update diagnostic status, 219, 233, 248
XML, 134 Upload to PG/PC, 188, 232, 247
Value comparison, 193

F
File
I
Export, 134 Icons, 45, 73, 74, 141, 189
Exporting, 134 Calibration log, 206
Import, 134 Change log, 211
Importing, 134 Configuration, 141
File menu, 60, 175, 183 Device, 141
Filter Diagnostics, 141
Change log, 209 LifeList, 154
Find (View menu) Loading to devices, 187, 220
Change log, 209 Maintenance, 141
Format Operating mode, 141
Export, 134 Process value, 141
Import, 134 Toolbar, 45, 73
Message log, 157 Upload to PG/PC, 74, 189
XML, 134 IE/PB link, 287
XSL, 134 Import
Parameter import, 133
Structure import, 133
G Import file, 134
Integrate, 110, 113
Groups
PROFIBUS device in SIMATIC PDM, 110
User, 171
PROFINET device in SIMATIC PDM, 113
Integrating a
HART multiplexer network, 104
Wireless HART gateway, 104, 109

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

296 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA
 Index

Introduction, 13 PROFIBUS device in SIMATIC PDM, 110

SIMATIC PDM, 13 Integrate, 110
PROFIBUS DP, 21
PROFINET, 22
K PROFINET device in SIMATIC PDM, 113
Integrate, 113
Keyboard operation, 81

R
L
Readme, 14
Liability, 29
Redundancy
License information, 263
Cancel, 119
Licenses
Field devices, 118
LifeList, 149
Rights
LifeList, 145
ASSET, 171
Load FF segment
Routing, 87
Tab, 129

S
M
Save (File menu), 175
Maintenance Station
Scope, 17
Several PCS 7 projects, 172
Secure Communication, 143
Measured value display
Service
Process variables, 215
Activating ASSET, 171
Menu
Starting ASSET, 172
Search..., 222
Settings
Message log
Device integration, 262
Saving, 157
Device Integration Manager, 261
Messages, 57, 58, 59
Semantics, 262
Modbus network, 23
SIMATIC PDM, 171, 258
Several PCS 7 projects
Asset service, 172
O Shortcut menu
Options menu, 171, 258 Complete device information, 57, 58
Messages, 57, 58, 59
Remove device description(s), 58, 59
P Shortcuts for menu commands, 81
Show all objects
Parameter export, 132
Change log, 209
Parameter import, 133
SIMATIC Manager
Parameter table, 75, 76
Download to devices, 186, 231, 246
Parameters, 75, 76
Exporting, 175, 230, 246
PDM
Importing, 179, 231, 246
Readme, 14
Start Connection Editor, 125
PDM client
Synchronizing with HW Config, 236
License, 263
Update diagnostic status, 219, 233, 248
PDM Web, 270
Upload to PG/PC, 188, 232, 247
Permissions
Value comparison, 193
ASSET, 171
SIMATIC PDM, 110, 113
Process variables
Download to devices, 186, 231, 246
Measured value display, 215
Exporting, 175, 230, 246

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA 297
Index

Importing, 179, 231, 246 x-y charts, 161

Integrating a PROFIBUS device, 110 y-t charts, 160
Integrating a PROFINET device, 113 Views
Start Connection Editor, 125 Correlation, 124
Synchronizing with HW Config, 236 Exception, 124
Update diagnostic status, 219, 233, 248
Upload to PG/PC, 188, 232, 247
Value comparison, 193 W
SIMATIC PDM Portal
Web, 270
Log on, 263
Wireless HART, 109
SIMATIC PDM Server
Configuration tool, 273
Split device list window (View menu), 60
Status, 76
Status bar, 48, 78
LifeList, 155
Structure export, 133
Structure import, 133

T
Transformation file
XSL, 134
Trend
(View menu), 163, 164
Adjust display range, 167
Capture, 167
Help, 168
Link axes, 168
Move axis, 168
Move ruler, 167
Ruler, 167
Trends
(View menu), 217

U
Unit, 76
Update diagnostic status, 219, 233, 248
Upload to PG/PC (Device menu), 188, 232, 247
User
Groups, 171

V
Value, 75
View menu, 60
Process variables, 215
Tachometer chart, 163
Trend, 163, 164, 217

Help for SIMATIC PDM (V9.1)

298 Operating Manual, 02/2017, A5E39027365-AA